DBS3900
Hardware Description Issue
02
Date
2012-04-25
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
DBS3900 Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document Purpose This document provides reference information for the DBS3900 site planning and deployment. It describes the application scenarios, components, functional modules, and cables in the DBS3900.
Product Version The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Product Version
DBS3900
V100R007C00
DBS3900 GSM
V100R014C00
DBS3900 WCDMA
V200R014C00
DBS3900 LTE
V100R005C00
DBS3900 LTE TDD
V100R005C00
Intended Audience This document is intended for: l
Base station installation personnel
l
System engineers
l
Site maintenance personnel
Organization 1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description. 2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
DBS3900 Hardware Description
About This Document
The DSB3900 consists of the required cabinets, BBU, RRUs, and other components in the cabinets. This chapter describes various cabinet application scenarios. 3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900 This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900. 4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks This chapter describes the exteriors, structures, specifications, and application scenarios of various DBS3900 cabinets and racks as well as the requirements for equipment in the DBS3900 cabinets. 5 DBS3900 Power System The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to -48 V DC power for the base station. 6 DBS3900 Monitoring System The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900. 7 DBS3900 Cables This chapter describes the cable connections in the DBS3900 and BBU3900 cables in various scenarios.
Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
DBS3900 Hardware Description
About This Document
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
DBS3900 Hardware Description
About This Document
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
DBS3900 Hardware Description
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.....................................................................1 2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet........................................................................4 2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet.......................................5 2.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet.................7 2.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06....................................................14 2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet.............................................................19
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900.......................................................................................23 3.1 BBU3900..........................................................................................................................................................24 3.1.1 BBU3900.................................................................................................................................................24 3.1.2 BBU3900 Functions................................................................................................................................25 3.1.3 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900...........................................................................................................25 3.1.4 WMPT.....................................................................................................................................................51 3.1.5 UMPT......................................................................................................................................................57 3.1.6 GTMU.....................................................................................................................................................64 3.1.7 LMPT.......................................................................................................................................................71 3.1.8 WBBP......................................................................................................................................................75 3.1.9 LBBP.......................................................................................................................................................81 3.1.10 FAN.......................................................................................................................................................86 3.1.11 UPEU.....................................................................................................................................................88 3.1.12 UEIU......................................................................................................................................................91 3.1.13 UTRP.....................................................................................................................................................92 3.1.14 USCU...................................................................................................................................................101 3.1.15 UBRI....................................................................................................................................................104 3.1.16 UCIU...................................................................................................................................................106 3.2 RRU................................................................................................................................................................109 3.3 SLPU..............................................................................................................................................................109 3.3.1 SLPU.....................................................................................................................................................109 3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU....................................................................................................109 3.3.3 UELP.....................................................................................................................................................110 3.3.4 UFLP.....................................................................................................................................................112 3.3.5 USLP2...................................................................................................................................................113 Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
DBS3900 Hardware Description
Contents
3.4 WGRU............................................................................................................................................................115 3.5 EMUA............................................................................................................................................................119
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks..................................................................................................120 4.1 Exteriors of DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks....................................................................................................121 4.2 DBS3900 Cabinets.........................................................................................................................................123 4.3 Technical Specifications of the DBS3900......................................................................................................153 4.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets................................................................................................................155 4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinets.........................................................................155 4.4.2 Components in the OMB.......................................................................................................................155 4.4.3 Components in the IMB03....................................................................................................................165 4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment.........................................................................................172
5 DBS3900 Power System............................................................................................................175 5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables.......................................................177 5.1.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet.........................177 5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet ........................................................................................................................................................................178 5.1.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or IMB03.....................................................183 5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet..................................................187 5.2 Power Distribution Schemes..........................................................................................................................188 5.2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet..........................189 5.2.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet ........................................................................................................................................................................192 5.2.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06.........................................199 5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet..................................................201
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System..................................................................................................205 6.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet...................................206 6.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet.............207 6.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06..................................................211 6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet...........................................................213 6.5 Customized Alarm Input................................................................................................................................216
7 DBS3900 Cables.........................................................................................................................220 7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900...............................................................................................................221 7.1.1 Power Cable Connections......................................................................................................................221 7.1.2 Transmission Cable Connections..........................................................................................................243 7.1.3 CPRI Cable Connections.......................................................................................................................265 7.1.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections..................................................................................................276 7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections....................................................................................................293 7.2 BBU3900 Cables............................................................................................................................................295 7.2.1 List of BBU3900 Cables........................................................................................................................295 7.2.2 PGND Cable..........................................................................................................................................298 7.2.3 BBU Power Cable.................................................................................................................................298 Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
DBS3900 Hardware Description
Contents
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable...........................................................................................................................................301 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable.................................................................................................304 7.2.6 FE/GE Cable..........................................................................................................................................305 7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable......................................................................................................306 7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports........................................................................307 7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports.................................................................................308 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable....................................................................................................................308 7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable.......................................................................................................................309 7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable.................................................................................................312 7.2.13 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable................................................................................................313 7.2.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU..............................................................314 7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA.............................................................................................315 7.2.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)..................................................................................316 7.2.17 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)..................................................................................317 7.2.18 BBU Alarm Cable...............................................................................................................................317 7.2.19 GPS Clock Signal Cable......................................................................................................................319 7.2.20 Inter-BBU Signal Cable.......................................................................................................................319 7.2.21 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations......................................................................................321 7.2.22 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance..................................................................................................323
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
DBS3900 Hardware Description
1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description
1
Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.
02 (2012-04-25) This is the second commercial issue. Compared with the issues for the 01 (2012-03-20), no information is added. Compared with the issues for the 01 (2012-03-20), this issue incorporates the following changes: Topic
Change Description
3.1.4 WMPT
Changed the description of the indicators on the boards.
3.1.5 UMPT 3.1.6 GTMU 3.1.7 LMPT 3.1.8 WBBP 3.1.10 FAN 3.1.11 UPEU 3.1.13 UTRP 3.1.14 USCU 3.1.16 UCIU 3.1.9 LBBP 3.1.15 UBRI
Compared with the issues for the 01 (2012-03-20), this issue deletes no contents. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
DBS3900 Hardware Description
1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description
01 (2012-03-20) This is the first commercial issue. Compared with the issues for the Draft A (2012-02-10), no information is added. Compared with the issues for the Draft A (2012-02-10), this issue incorporates the following changes: Topic
Change Description
3.1.9 LBBP
Added the cell bandwidth of the LBBP.
7.2.20 Inter-BBU Signal Cable
Changed the exterior of the inter-BBU signal cable.
Compared with the issues for the Draft A (2012-02-10), this issue deletes no contents.
Draft A (2012-02-10) This is the first draft. Compared with the issues for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00, GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue incorporates the following new topics: l
4.3 Technical Specifications of the DBS3900
l
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinets
l
HEUA
l
AC Surge Protection Box
l
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Single-Mode Base Station
l
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Single-Mode Base Station
l
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in CoTransmission Mode
l
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in CoTransmission Mode
l
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
l
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
l
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Triple-Mode Base Station
l
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Triple-Mode Base Station
l
7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections
l
7.2.20 Inter-BBU Signal Cable
l
7.2.21 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations
l
7.2.22 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance
l
3.2 RRU
l
3.1.5 UMPT
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
DBS3900 Hardware Description
1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description
l
2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
l
5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
l
5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
l
6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
l
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
l
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
Compared with the issues for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00, GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue incorporates the following changes: Topic
Change Description
4.1 Exteriors of DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Added the exteriors of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.
3.1.8 WBBP
Added the description of the WBBPf.
3.1.9 LBBP
Added the description of the LBBPd.
3.1.14 USCU
Changed the names of the USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb21.
3.1.3 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900
Added the slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU0 and BBU1 in the GU+UL (BBUs interconnected) scenario.
CPRI Cable Connections in the UL Base Station
Added the CPRI cable connections in the CPRI MUX topology.
4.2 DBS3900 Cabinets
Added the configurations of the TP48600A cabinet.
6.5 Customized Alarm Input
Added the customized alarm input when the DBS3900 uses the TP48600A cabinet.
Compared with the issues for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00, GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue deletes no contents.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
About This Chapter The DSB3900 consists of the required cabinets, BBU, RRUs, and other components in the cabinets. This chapter describes various cabinet application scenarios. 2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, it can use APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) cabinets and other types of cabinets to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity. 2.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, it can use APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinets and other types of cabinets to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity. 2.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors or indoors, it can use an OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 to achieve flexible installation. 2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, it can use TP48600A-H17B1 cabinets and other types of cabinets to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity. TP48600A-H17B1 is shortened to TP48600A in this document.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/ APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, it can use APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) cabinets and other types of cabinets to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity.
Rules for Configuring the Cabinet NOTE
In this section, the APM is APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A), and the TMC is TMC or TMC11H (Ver. A).
l
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. If there are more than 12 RRUs, they must be configured in different base stations.
l
A single APM or TMC can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.
l
A single APM can be installed together with only one TMC and a maximum of one integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
l
A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-core optical cables can be led out from a single APM.
l
A single DCDU supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.
l
The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the battery cabinet.
l
A BBC or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked under a TMC. BBC is short for battery backup cabinet. The BBC or IBBS200T is stacked under the TMC.
l
During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet and TMC, if required, are positioned on the left. If both the battery cabinet and the TMC are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the TMC is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.
l
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets for capacity expansion and the original cabinets are not relocated. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse way of the base station deployment scenario.
Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station NOTE
The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.
A single-mode or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 6 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APMs are required. The BBU is installed in the main APM, which is on the left. Table 2-1 describes the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power requirements, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Table 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Requirement
Space Required for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM+1 TMC
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs + 1 TMC
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM + 1 IBBS
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM+1 TMC +1 IBBS
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs + 2 IBBSs
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs + 2 IBBSs + 1 TMC
≤9U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 TMC (with one DCDU)
≤8U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TMC (with two DCDUs)
0.5 h/2 h backup power
-48V DC
-
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if there is no backup power requirement
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
When a site requires 0.5 h or 2 h backup power, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-2. Figure 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if 0.5 h or 2 h backup power is provided
When a -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
2.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, it can use APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinets and other types of cabinets to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Rules for Configuring the Cabinet NOTE
In this section, the APM is APM30H(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C), and the TMC is TMCH (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C). APM is short for advanced power module, APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler, TMC is short for transmission cabinet, and TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat-exchanger cooler.
l
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. If there are more than 12 RRUs, they must be configured in different base stations.
l
A single APM or TMC can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.
l
A single APM supports only one TMC and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. The IBBS200D is an integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation, and the IBBS200T is an integrated battery backup system with TEC. TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
l
A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-core optical cables can be led out from a single APM.
l
A single DCDU supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.
l
The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the battery cabinet.
l
A BBC or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked under a TMC. BBC is short for battery backup cabinet. The BBC or IBBS200T is stacked under the TMC.
l
During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and auxiliary cabinets such as battery cabinet and TMC, if required, are positioned on the left. If both the battery cabinet and the TMC are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the TMC is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.
l
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets for capacity expansion and the original cabinets are not relocated. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse way of the base station deployment scenario.
Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 6 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APMs are required. The BBU is installed in the main APM, which is on the left. Table 2-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power requirements, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirement
Space Required for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirement
0.5 h/2 h backup power
4 h/6 h/8 h backup power
-48 V DC
+24V DC
-
-
Space Required for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM+1 TMC
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+1 TMC
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM+1 IBBS
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM+1 TMC +1 IBBS
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+2 IBBSs
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+2 IBBSs+1 TMC
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM+2 IBBSs
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM+2 IBBSs+1 TMC
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+4 IBBSs
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+4 IBBSs+1 TMC
≤9U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 TMC (with one DCDU)
≤8U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TMC (with two DCDUs)
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in Figure 2-4.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Figure 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station if there is no backup power requirement
When a site requires 0.5 h or 2 h backup power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-5. Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station if 0.5 h or 2 h backup power is provided
When a site requires 4 h, 6 h, or 8 h backup power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-6.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station if 4 h, 6 h, or 8 h backup power is provided
When a -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-7. Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
Figure 2-8 shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when +24 V DC power is provided. Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the +24V DC scenario
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU0 is installed in the main APM or TMC on the left. BBU1 is installed in the extension APM or TMC on the right. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Table 2-3 describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different backup power requirements, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-3 Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station Power Supply
Backup Power Requirement
Space Required for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs
≤ 21 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+1 TMC
0.5 h/2 h backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+2 IBBSs
≤ 21 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+2 IBBSs+1 TMC
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+4 IBBSs
≤ 21 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APMs+4 IBBSs+1 TMC
4 h/6 h/8 h backup power
-48 V DC
-
≤ 18 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 TMCs
+24 V DC
-
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs (Ver.B, +24 V)
In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if there is no backup power requirement, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-9. Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station if there is no backup power requirement
When a site requires 0.5 h or 2 h backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-10.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Figure 2-10 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station if 0.5 h or 2 h backup power is provided
When a site requires 4 h, 6 h, or 8 h backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-11. Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station if 4 h, 6 h, or 8 h backup power is provided
Figure 2-12 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when a - 48 V DC power is provided. Figure 2-12 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the - 48 V DC scenario
Figure 2-13 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when a +24 V DC power is provided. Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC scenario
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
2.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors or indoors, it can use an OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 to achieve flexible installation.
Cabinet configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station When the DBS3900 in single or dual mode uses the OMB or IMB03, the BBU can be configured in the OMB or IMB03, and RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steels, or U-steels. When the DBS3900 use both the IMB03 and IFS06, the IMB03 and IFS06 can be installed together, which is called the Indoor Centralized Rack (ICR) scenario. Table 2-4 lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different application scenarios, external power supplies, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Space Required for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
Application Environment
110 V AC or 220 V AC
≤3U
1 RRU
1 OMB
Outdoors
≤6U
6 RRUs
2 IMB03s+1 IFS06
Indoors
≤ 12 U
12 RRUs
4 IMB03s+2 IFS06s
≤3U
1 RRU
1 IMB03
≤3U
3 RRUs
1 OMB
Outdoors
≤3U
6 RRUs
1 IMB03+1 IFS06
Indoors
≤6U
12 RRUs
2 IMB03s+2 IFS06s
≤3U
6 RRUs
1 IMB03
≤6U
6 RRUs
2 IMB03s+1 IFS06
≤ 12 U
12 RRUs
4 IMB03s+2 IFS06s
-48 V DC
+24 V DC
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Indoors
14
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Figure 2-14 shows the OMB cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is provided. Figure 2-14 OMB cabinet configurations supported by a single- or dual-mode base station in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenario
Figure 2-15 shows the ICR configuration for a single- or dual-mode base station when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is provided. Figure 2-15 ICR configuration supported by a single- or dual-mode base station in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenario
Figure 2-16 shows the IMB03 configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is provided. Figure 2-16 IMB03 cabinet configurations supported by a single- or dual-mode base station in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenario
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Figure 2-17 shows the OMB cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when -48 V DC power is provided. Figure 2-17 OMB cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
Figure 2-18 shows the ICR configuration for a single- or dual-mode base station when -48 V DC power is provided. Figure 2-18 ICR configuration for a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
Figure 2-19 shows the IMB03 cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when -48 V DC power is provided. Figure 2-19 Configuration of a single IMB03 for a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Figure 2-20 shows the ICR configuration for a single- or dual-mode base station when +24 V DC power is provided. Figure 2-20 ICR configuration for a single- or dual-mode base station in the +24 V DC scenario
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station When the DBS3900 use the ICR mode, it can be configured as a triple-mode base station. Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU0 is installed in the main ICR (left) or the main IMB03 (upper). BBU1 is installed in the extension ICR (right) or the extension IMB03 (lower). NOTE
When the DBS3900 use an OMB or IMB03, it can only be configured as a single- or dual-mode base station.
Table 2-5 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different application scenarios, external power supplies, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-5 Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station Power Supply
Space Required for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
Application Environment
110 V AC or 220 V AC
≤ 12 U
12 RRUs
4 IMB03+2 IFS06
Indoors
-48 V DC
≤6U
6 RRU
2 IMB03s+1 IFS06
≤6U
12 RRU
2 IMB03s+2 IFS06s
≤ 12 U
12 RRU
4 IMB03s+2 IFS06s
+24 V DC
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Figure 2-21 shows the ICR configuration for a triple-mode base station when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is provided. Figure 2-21 Configuration of a triple-mode base station in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
Figure 2-22 shows the ICR configuration for a triple-mode base station when -48 V DC power is provided. Figure 2-22 Configuration of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V AC power supply scenario
Figure 2-23 shows the ICR configuration for a triple-mode base station when +24 V DC power is provided.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Figure 2-23 Configuration of a triple-mode base station in the +24 V AC power supply scenario
2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, it can use TP48600A-H17B1 cabinets and other types of cabinets to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity. TP48600A-H17B1 is shortened to TP48600A in this document.
Rules for Configuring the Cabinet l
A TP48600A cabinet can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet side by side.
l
A TP48600A cabinet can be installed together with a IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet side by side.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station In a single- or dual-mode base station, the TP48600A cabinet is configured with one BBU that is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-11C. Table 2-6 lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements for backup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Power Supply
Power Backup Capacity
Space Required for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
48 V, 300 Ah
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Power Supply
Power Backup Capacity
Space Required for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
48 V, 600 Ah
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Figure 2-24 shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space requirements for customer equipment when the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used and the base station requires the power backup capacity of 48 V and 300 Ah. Figure 2-24 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station requiring the power backup capacity of 48 V and 300 Ah
Figure 2-25 shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space requirements for customer equipment when the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used and the base station requires the power backup capacity of 48 V and 600 Ah. Figure 2-25 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station requiring the power backup capacity of 48 V and 600 Ah
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station In a triple-mode base station, the TP48600A cabinet is configured with two BBUs: BBU0 and BBU1. BBU0 is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-11C and BBU1 is installed in the 2 U space under the BBU0. Table 2-7 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements for backup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-7 Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station Power Supply
Backup Power Requirement
Space Required for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
48 V, 300 Ah
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
48 V, 600 Ah
Figure 2-26 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space requirements for customer equipment when the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used and the triple-mode base station requires the power backup capacity of 48 V and 300 Ah. Figure 2-26 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station requiring the power backup capacity of 48 V and 300 Ah
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
DBS3900 Hardware Description
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Figure 2-27 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space requirements for customer equipment when the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used and the triple-mode base station requires the power backup capacity of 48 V and 600 Ah. Figure 2-27 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station requiring the power backup capacity of 48 V and 600 Ah
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Functional Modules in the DBS3900
About This Chapter This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900. 3.1 BBU3900 This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications. 3.2 RRU The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna system. 3.3 SLPU The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP, UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection. 3.4 WGRU The WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock signals together with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS positioning information. The WGRU is optional. It is installed in a dedicated case. Each base station can be configured with a WGRU. 3.5 EMUA The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet and reports related alarms.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
3.1 BBU3900 This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.
3.1.1 BBU3900 The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high. The dimensions of the BBU3900 are 86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (3.39 in. x 17.4 in. x 12.2 in.) (H x W x D), as shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 BBU3900
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). It is used during base station commissioning. l
If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 ESN (1)
l
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-3 ESN (2)
3.1.2 BBU3900 Functions The BBU3900 is a baseband processing unit. It processes the baseband signals of the base station. The BBU3900 performs the following functions: l
Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC or RNC.
l
Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
l
Provides USB(1) ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration data can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
l
Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 to operate and maintain the base station.
l
Processes uplink and downlink data.
l
Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing.
l
Provides the system clock. NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
3.1.3 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900 This section describes the slot assignment of the BBU3900 in the following modes: BBU3900 GSM, BBU3900 UMTS, BBU3900 LTE, BBU3900 GSM+UMTS (shortened to GU), BBU3900 GSM+LTE (shortened to GL), BBU3900 UMTS+LTE (shortened to UL), BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not cascaded), BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not cascaded), BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs cascaded), BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs cascaded), and BBU3900 GU+UL (BBUs cascaded).
Slots of the BBU3900 The slots of the BBU3900 are in the same positions regardless of the mode of the BBU3900, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-4 Slots of the BBU3900
BBU3900 GSM Table 3-1 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM. Table 3-1 Slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
GTMU
Mandatory
1
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured only in slot 6 (with both slots 5 and 6 occupied).
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot 16
It is configured only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19.
USCU
Optional
1
Slot 0 or 1
It is preferentially configured in slot 1. A dual-satellite card, if required, is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
UTRP
Optional
1
Slot 0 or 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
UCIU
Optional
1
Slot 0 or 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
UBRI
Optional
1
Slot 2
-
Figure 3-5 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 supporting the GSM standard. Figure 3-5 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 supporting the GSM standard
BBU3900 UMTS Table 3-2 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS. Table 3-2 Slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
2
Slot 6 or 7
A single WMPT is preferentially configured in slot 7. The slot assignment rules for the UMPT are different from those for the WMPT.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WBBP
Mandatory
6
Slots 0 to 5
It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 2, 4, or 5. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that a WBBP is installed in each of slots 2 and 3. At least one of the WBBPs in slots 2 and 3 is WBBPd or WBBPf. The WBBPf takes precedence over the WBBPd during slot assignment.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot16
It is configured only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
UTRP
Optional
2
Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or 6
The board is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 4, 5, 0, 1, or 6.
USCU
Optional
1
Slot 1 or 0
The USCU is preferentially configured in slot 1. A dual-satellite card, if required, is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
Figure 3-6 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UMTS. Figure 3-6 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UMTS
BBU3900 LTE Table 3-3 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-3 Slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
2
Slot 6 or 7
A single LMPT is configured in slot 7.
LBBP
Mandatory
6
Slots 0 to 5
A single LBBP is preferentially configured in slot 3. The board is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 1, 2, 0, 4, or 5.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot16
Configured only in slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
UTRP
Optional
1
Slot 4 or slot 5
It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
USCU
Optional
1
Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5
A single USCU is preferentially configured in slot 5. A USCU that occupies 1 U space is configured in slots 5 and 4. If slots 4 and 5 are occupied, a USCU is preferentially configured in slot 1, or a USCU that uses a dual-satellite card is configured in slot 1, with both slots 1 and 0 occupied.
Figure 3-7 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 LTE. Figure 3-7 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 LTE
BBU3900 Working in GU Mode Table 3-4 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 working in GU mode.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-4 Slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 working in GU mode Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
1
Slot 7
The WMPT can be configured only in slot 7. The slot assignment rules for the UMPT are different from those for the WMPT.
GTMU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Mandatory
1
Slots 5 and 6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied).
32
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WBBP
Mandatory
5
Slots 0 to 4
It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the board is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 2, or 4. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that a WBBP is installed in each of slots 2 and 3. At least one of the WBBPs in slots 2 and 3 is WBBPd or WBBPf. The WBBPf takes precedence over the WBBPd during slot assignment.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot16
Configured only in slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU can be configured only in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
UTRP
Optional
2
Slot 0 or 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The slot priority of the GO UTRP is higher than that of the UO UTRP.
USCU
Optional
1
Slot 0 or 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
UBRI
Optional
1
Slot 2
-
Figure 3-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GU mode. Figure 3-8 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GU mode
BBU3900 Working in GL Mode Table 3-5 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 working in GL mode.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-5 Slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 working in GL mode Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
1
Slot 7
It is configured only in slot 7. The slot assignment rules for the UMPT are different from those for the WMPT.
GTMU
Mandatory
1
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied).
LBBP
Mandatory
5
Slots 0 to 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 3. The board is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 1, 2, 0, or 4.
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot16
Configured only in slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
UTRP
Optional
2
Slot 0 or 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The UTRP in GSM mode takes precedence over the UTRP in LTE mode during slot assignment.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
USCU
Optional
1
Slot 0 or 4
The USCU is preferentially configured in slot 1. A USCU using a dual-satellite card, if required, is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
Optional
UBRI
1
Slot 2
-
Figure 3-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GL mode. Figure 3-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 working in GL mode
BBU3900 Working in UL Mode Table 3-6 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 working in UL mode. Table 3-6 Slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 working in UL mode
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
1
Slot 6
It is configured only in slot 6.
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
1
Slot 7
It is configured only in slot 7.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
LBBP
Mandatory
5
Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or 5
A single LBBP is configured only in slot 2. If more LBBPs are required, the LBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 2, 1, 0, 4, or 5.
WBBP
Mandatory
5
Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or 5
A single WBBP is configured only in slot 3. If more LBBPs are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 4, or 5. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is configured only in slot 3. Only one WBBP can be configured in slot 2 or slot 3 that privides six CPRI ports at most.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot 16
Configured only in slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
UTRP
Optional
2
Slot 4 or slot 5
It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The UTRP in UMTS mode takes precedence over the UTRP in LTE mode during slot assignment.
USCU
Optional
1
Slot 4 or slot 5
It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
Figure 3-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UL mode. Figure 3-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 working in UL mode
BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not cascaded) BBU3900 Working in GU Mode describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU supporting the GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not cascaded). BBU3900 LTE describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU supporting the LTE mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not cascaded).
BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not Cascaded) BBU3900 Working in GL Mode describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU supporting the GL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not cascaded). BBU3900 UMTS describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU supporting the UMTS mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not cascaded). Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs Cascaded) Table 3-7 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs cascaded). Table 3-7 Slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU0 Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
1
Slot 7
The WMPT can be configured only in slot 7. The slot assignment rules for the UMPT are different from those for the WMPT.
GTMU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Mandatory
1
Slots 5 and 6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied).
39
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WBBP
Mandatory
4
Slot 0 to slot 3
It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the board is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, or 2. If a WBBPd is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that two WBBPs are installed in slots 2 and 3. At least one of the two WBBPs is WBBPd.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot 16
Configured only in slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU can be configured only in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
UTRP
Optional
1
Slot 0 or 1
Preferentially configured in slot 0
USCU
Optional
1
Slot 0 or 1
Preferentially configured in slot 0
UBRI
Optional
1
Slot 2
-
UCIU
Mandatory
1
Slot4
-
Table 3-8 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU1 working in LO mode. Table 3-8 Slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU1 Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
2
Slot 6 or 7
A single LMPT is configured in slot 7. The slot assignment rules for the UMPT are different from those for the WMPT. The UMPT must be configured as the main control board in the UCIU+UMPT cascading scenario.
LBBP
Mandatory
6
Slots 0 to 5
A single LBBP is preferentially configured in slot 3. The board is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 1, 2, 0, 4, or 5.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot 16
Configured only in slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
UTRP
Optional
1
Slot 4 or slot 5
It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
USCU
Optional
1
Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5
A single USCU is preferentially configured in slot 5. A USCU that occupies 1 U space is configured in slots 5 and 4. If slots 4 and 5 are occupied, a USCU is preferentially configured in slot 1, or a USCU that uses a dual-satellite card is configured in slot 1, with both slots 1 and 0 occupied.
NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.
BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs Cascaded) Table 3-9 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs cascaded).
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-9 Slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU0 Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
1
Slot 7
It is configured only in slot 7. The slot assignment rules for the UMPT are different from those for the WMPT. The UMPT must be configured as the main control board in the UCIU+UMPT cascading scenario.
GTMU
Mandatory
1
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied).
LBBP
Mandatory
4
Slots 0 to 3
It is preferentially configured in slot 3. The board is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 1, 2, or 0.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot 16
Configured only in slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
UTRP
Optional
1
Slot 0 or 1
Preferentially configured in slot 0 The UTRP in GSM mode takes precedence over the UTRP in LTE mode during slot assignment.
Optional
USCU
1
Slot 0 or 1
The board is preferentially configured in slot 0. A USCU using a dual-satellite card, if required, is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
UBRI
Optional
1
Slot 2
-
UCIU
Mandatory
1
Slot4
-
Table 3-10 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU1 working in UO mode. Table 3-10 Slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU1 Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
2
Slot 6 or 7
A single WMPT is preferentially configured in slot 7. The slot assignment rules for the UMPT is the same as that of the WMPT.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WBBP
Mandatory
6
Slots 0 to 5
It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 2, 4, or 5. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that a WBBP is installed in each of slots 2 and 3. At least one of the WBBPs in slots 2 and 3 is WBBPd or WBBPf. The WBBPf takes precedence over the WBBPd during slot assignment.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot 16
It is configured only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
UTRP
Optional
2
Slot 0, slot 1, slot 4, slot 5, and slot 6
It is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 4, 5, 0, 1, 6.
USCU
Optional
1
Slot 1 or 0
The USCU is preferentially configured in slot 1. A USCU using a dual-satellite card, if required, is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.
BBU3900 GU+UL (BBUs Cascaded) Table 3-11 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU0 supporting GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+UL (BBUs cascaded).
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-11 Slot assignment rules for the boards in BBU0 Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
1
Slot 7
The WMPT can be configured only in slot 7. The slot assignment rules for the UMPT are different from those for the WMPT.
GTMU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Mandatory
1
Slots 5 and 6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied).
47
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
WBBP
Mandatory
4
Slot 0 to slot 3
It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the board is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, or 2. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that a WBBP is installed in each of slots 2 and 3. At least one of the WBBPs in slots 2 and 3 is WBBPd or WBBPf. The WBBPf takes precedence over the WBBPd during slot assignment.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot16
Configured only in slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU can be configured only in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
UTRP
Optional
1
Slot 0 or 1
Preferentially configured in slot 0 The slot priority of the GO UTRP is higher than that of the UO UTRP.
Optional
USCU
1
Slot 0 or 1
Preferentially configured in slot 0 A USCU using a dual-satellite card, if required, is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
UBRI
Optional
1
Slot2
-
UCIU
Mandatory
1
Slot4
-
Table 3-12 describes the slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 working in UL mode. Table 3-12 Slot assignment rules for the boards in the BBU3900 working in UL mode
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
1
Slot 6
It is configured only in slot 6.
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
1
Slot 7
It is configured only in slot 7.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
LBBP
Mandatory
5
Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, 5
A single LBBP is configured only in slot 2. If more LBBPs are required, the LBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 2, 1, 0, 4, or 5.
WBBP
Mandatory
4
Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or 5
A single WBBP is configured only in slot 3. If more LBBPs are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 4, or 5. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is configured only in slot 3. Only one WBBP can be configured in slot 2 or slot 3 that privides six CPRI ports at most.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
FAN
Mandatory
1
Slot16
Configured only in slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
2
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
1
Slot 18
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
UTRP
Optional
1
Slot 4 or slot 5
It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The UTRP in UMTS mode takes precedence over the UTRP in LTE mode during slot assignment.
Optional
USCU
1
Slot 4 or slot 5
It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.
3.1.4 WMPT The WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) processes signals for the BBU3900 and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
Specifications of the WMPT Table 3-13 lists the transmission capabilities of the WMPT. Table 3-13 Transmission capabilities of the WMPT
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Board
Transmission Mode
Port
Port Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
WMPT
ATM over E1/ T1 or IP over E1/T1
1
Four channels
Full-duplex
Transmission over FE/GE optical ports
1
10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmission over FE/GE electrical ports
1
10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Panel Figure 3-11 shows the WMPT. Figure 3-11 WMPT
Functions The WMPT performs the following functions: l
Performs OM functions such as configuration management, equipment management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active and standby switchover, and provides OM channel to communicate with the LMT or M2000.
l
Provides a reference clock for the system.
l
Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
l
Provides USB ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration data can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
l
Provides a 4-channel E1 port over ATM or IP.
l
Provides an FE electrical port and an FE optical port over IP.
Indicator Table 3-14 describes the indicators on the WMPT panel. Table 3-14 Indicators on the WMPT panel Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is functioning properly.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
ALM
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced.
Steady off
The board is running properly.
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
Steady off
l The board does not serve as an active board.
ACT
Green
l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services. On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
The operation and maintenance link (OML) is disconnected.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is being tested, such as an RRU Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) test through a USB(2)(3) flash drive.
In addition to the preceding three indicators, there are six indicators on the board, which indicate the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and debugging port. The six indicators do not have silkscreen on the WMPT panel, whereas they are at both sides of the corresponding ports, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-12 Indicators for the ports on the WMPT
Table 3-15 describes the indicators. Table 3-15 Indicators Indicator
Color
Status
Description
Indicators for the FE1 optical port
Green (LINK)
Steady on
The connection is set up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set up.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received.
Steady on
The connection is set up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set up.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received.
Steady on
The connection is set up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set up.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
Orange (ACT)
Indicators for the FE0 electrical port
Green (LINK)
Orange (ACT)
Indicators for the ETH port
Green (LINK)
Orange (ACT)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received.
Ports Table 3-16 describes the ports on the panel of the WMPT. Table 3-16 Ports on the panel of the WMPT Silkscreen
Connector
Description
E1/T1 port
DB26 connector
E1/T1 port
FE0
RJ45 connector
FE electrical port
FE1
SFP connector
FE optical port
GPS
SMA connector
Reserved
ETH(1)
RJ45 connector
Commissioning
TST(2)
USB connector
USB commissioning port
USB(3)
USB connector
USB loading port
RST
-
Reset button
NOTE
(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port. (2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration. (3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
DIP Switch The WMPT has two DIP switches. SW1 is used to set the work mode of the E1/T1 signal cable, and SW2 is used to set the resistance of the four E1/T1 signal cables in different modes. Figure 3-13 shows the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-13 DIP switch settings of the WMPT
Table 3-17 and Table 3-18 list the DIP switch settings of the WMPT. Table 3-17 Settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the WMPT DIP switch SW1
DIP Status
Description
1
2
3
4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
T1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohm.
ON
ON
ON
ON
The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohm.
Others
Unavailable
Table 3-18 Settings of the DIP switch SW2 on the WMPT DIP switch
DIP Status 1
2
3
4
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Unbalanced
Description
Others
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Unavailable
56
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
3.1.5 UMPT The universal main processing and transmission unit (UMPT) processes signals and manages resources on other boards in the BBU3900.
Specifications of the UMPT The UMPT is classified into three types: UMPTa1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6. Table 3-19 lists the specifications of the UMPTa1, UMPTa2 and UMPTa6. Table 3-19 Specifications of the UMPT Board
Mode
Transmissi on Mode
Port
Port Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
UMPTa1
UMTS
ATM over E1/T1 or IP over E1/T1
1
4
-
Transmissio n over FE/ GE electrical ports
1
10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio n over FE/ GE optical ports
1
100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s
Full- or halfduplex
IP over E1/ T1
1
4
-
Transmissio n over FE/ GE electrical ports
1
10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio n over FE/ GE optical ports
1
100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s
Full- or halfduplex
UMPTa2/ UMPTa6
LTE
Panel Figure 3-14, Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the panels of the UMPTs. Figure 3-14 Panel of the UMPTa1
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-15 Panel of the UMPTa2
Figure 3-16 Panel of the UMPTa6
Functions The UMPT performs the following functions: l
Performs configuration management, device management, performance monitoring, signaling message processing, and active/standby switchover
l
Controls all boards in the system
l
Provides a reference clock for the system
l
Transmits signals and provides absolute time information and 1PPS reference clock source through its integrated satellite card.
l
Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission in compliance with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP), and Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) during the initial configuration
Indicators Table 3-20 describes the indicators on the UMPT. Table 3-20 Indicators on the UMPT
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is running properly.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Steady off
There is no fault.
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
Steady off
l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
The OML is disconnected.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is being tested, such as an RRU Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) test through a USB(1) flash drive. NOTE Of all types of UMPT boards, only the UMPTa2 has this status.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
LINK of the optical port
ACT of the optical port
LINK of the electrical port
Orange
Green
ACT of the electrical port
CI
Green
Orange
Red or green
Status
Description
In every 4s, the indicator is on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s (eight times) in the first 2s and then off for 2s.
Services are not available.
Steady on
The connection is normal.
Steady off
The connection is abnormal.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted.
Steady on
The connection is normal.
Steady off
The connection is abnormal.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted.
Steady green
The inter-BBU transmission link is normal.
Steady red
An optical module fails to receive signals because of one of the following reasons:
NOTE Of all types of UMPT boards, only the UMPTa2 has this status.
l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Cables are connected in an incorrect manner. For example: l In the UCIU +UMPT scenario, the S0 port on the UCIU is connected to the CI port on the UMPT. Indicators for the S0 and CI ports are blinking. l The ports are connected in ring topology. Indicators for all the ports that are connected in ring topology are blinking.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Steady off
The optical module cannot be detected.
R0, R1, and R2
Red or green
-
Reserved
L01
Red and green
Steady off
E1/T1 link 0 or 1 is not set up, or a loss of sign (LOS) alarm is generated.
Steady green
E1/T1 links 0 and 1 are working properly.
Blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s)
E1/T1 link 0 is working properly, but E1/T1 link 1 is not set up or an LOS alarm is generated.
Blinking green (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
E1/T1 link 1 is working properly, but E1/T1 link 0 is not set up or an LOS alarm is generated.
Steady red
Alarms are generated on E1/T1 links 0 and 1.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
L23
Color
Red and green
Status
Description
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated on E1/T1 link 0.
Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
An alarm is generated on E1/T1 link 1.
Steady off
E1/T1 link 2 or 3 is not set up, or an LOS alarm is generated.
Steady green
E1/T1 links 2 and 3 are working properly.
Blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s)
E1/T1 link 2 is working properly, but E1/T1 link 3 is not set up or an LOS alarm is generated.
Blinking green (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
E1/T1 link 3 is working properly, but E1/T1 link 2 is not set up or an LOS alarm is generated.
Steady red
Alarms are generated on E1/T1 links 2 and 3.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated on E1/T1 link 2.
Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
An alarm is generated on E1/T1 link 3.
Ports Table 3-21 describes the ports on the UMPT. Table 3-21 Ports on the UMPT
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
FE/GE1
SFP connector
A 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernet optical port is used for transmitting service data and signaling messages.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
FE/GE0
RJ45 connector
A 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernet electrical port is used for transmitting service data and signaling messages.
USB (1)
USB connector
The USB port is used for the software upgrade of a base station using a Universal Serial Bus (USB) storage device. This port also functions as a commissioning Ethernet port. The USB port with the CLK silkscreen is used for multiplexing TOD and test clock.
E1/T1
DB26 female connector
The port is used for four E1/T1 signal inputs and outputs between the UMPT and the universal E1/ T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or between base station controllers.
GPS
SMA connector
The GPS port on the UMPTa1 or UMPTa2 is reserved. The GPS port on the UMPTa6 is used for transmitting radio frequency (RF) signals received from the antenna to the satellite receiver.
CI
SFP connector
The port is used for BBU interconnection.
RST
-
The port is used to reset the board.
NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. (2) When the USB port functions as a commissioning Ethernet port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port before accessing the base station through the USB port.
DIP Switch There are two DIP switches on the UMPT: SW1 and SW2. Figure 3-17 shows the positions of DIP switches on the UMPT. Figure 3-17 Positions of DIP switches on the UMPT
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions: l
SW1 is used to select the E1/T1 mode. Table 3-22 describes the DIP switch.
l
SW2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission. Table 3-23 describes the DIP switch.
Table 3-22 DIP switch SW1 DIP Switch
SW1
DIP Status
Description
1
2
ON
ON
The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohm.
OFF
ON
The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohm.
ON
OFF
The T1 resistance is set to 100 ohm.
Table 3-23 DIP switch SW2 DIP Switch
DIP Status
Description
1
2
3
4
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Unbalanced
3.1.6 GTMU The GSM transmission and timing and management unit for BBU (GTMU) is the basic transmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power, control and manage the entire BTS.
Specifications of the GTMU The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-24 lists the specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-24 Specifications of the GTMU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Board
Mode
Transmissi on Mode
Port
Port Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
GTMU/ GTMUb
GSM
TDM over E1/T1
1
Four channels
Full-duplex
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Mode
Transmissi on Mode
Port
Port Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
Transmissio n over FE/ GE optical ports
1
10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio n over FE/ GE electrical ports
1
10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Panel Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb. Figure 3-18 GTMU panel
Figure 3-19 GTMUb panel
Functions The GTMU performs the following functions: l
Controls, maintains, and operates the base station.
l
Supports fault management, configuration management, performance management, and security management.
l
Monitors the fans and power modules.
l
Provides and manages the clock source of the base station in centralized mode.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
l
Provides the clock output for test.
l
Provides the FE port for maintenance on the OM system.
l
Supports transmission through four E1s and two FEs.
l
Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
Indicators Table 3-25 describes the indicators on the GTMU. Table 3-25 Indicators on the GTMU Indicator
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is running properly.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
Software is being loaded to the board.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Steady off
There is no fault.
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
The OML is disconnected.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Besides the preceding three indicators, there are some other indicators on the board, indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port, commissioning port. They are near the corresponding ports and have no silkscreen. Table 3-26 describes the indicators. Table 3-26 Indicators for ports
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
LIU0 to LIU3
Green
Steady on
An E1/T1 local alarm is generated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Indicator
Color
CPRI0 to CPRI5
Red or green
Status
Description
On for 1s and off for 1s
An E1/T1 remote alarm is generated.
Steady off
The link is functional.
Steady green
The CPRI link is functioning properly.
Steady red
An optical module fails to receive signals because of one of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The CPRI link is out of lock because of one of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between dualmode clock sources. l There is mismatched data rate over CPRI ports.
Steady off
l The optical module cannot be detected. l The CPRI cable is not connected.
ETH
Green (LINK indicator on the left)
Orange (ACT indicator on the right)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Steady on
The connection is set up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set up.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
FE0
Green (LINK indicator on the left)
Steady on
The connection is set up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set up.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received.
Steady on
The connection is set up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set up.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received.
Orange (ACT indicator on the right)
FE1 (on the GTMUb)
Green (LINK indicator on the left)
Green (ACT indicator on the right)
M_S (on the GTMUb)
-
-
Indicator for the reserved port.
EXT (on the GTMUb)
-
-
This is the indicator of the reserved port.
Ports Table 3-27 describes the ports on the GTMU. Table 3-27 Ports on the GTMU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5
SFP female connector
Data transmission port interconnected to the RFU. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals.
EXT (on the GTMUb)
SFP female connector
Reserved
ETH(1)
RJ45 connector
Local maintenance and commissioning port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
FE0
RJ45 connector
Connected to the routers in the equipment room through FE cables to transmit network information
FE1
DLC connector
Connected to the routers in the equipment room through optical cables to transmit network information
TST(2)
USB connector
Providing reference clock for the test instruments
USB(3)
USB connector
Used for automatic software upgrade through the USB flash drive
E1/T1 port
DB26 female connector
Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs between the GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs
NOTE
(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port. (2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration. (3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
The RST button on the panel of the GTMU is used for resetting the board.
DIP Switch On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and S2 need to be set jointly. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows: l
S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 3-28 provides details on the DIP switch.
l
S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission cables. Table 3-29 provides details on the DIP switch.
l
S3 is reserved.
l
S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 3-30 provides details on the DIP switch.
l
S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 3-31 provides details on the DIP switch.
Table 3-28 Description on S1
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
DIP Switch
DIP Status 1
2
3
4
S1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohm.
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohm.
Description
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
DIP Switch
DIP Status
Description
1
2
3
4
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Others
The T1 resistance is set to 100 ohm. Unavailable
NOTE
Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the out-of-factory state, without any manual setting on site. The out-offactory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.
Table 3-29 Description on S2 DIP Switch
DIP Status
Description
1
2
3
4
S2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
All the bits are set to OFF by default in all modes.
ON
ON
ON
ON
When the four E1 RX links in 75 ohm have errors, all the bits of S2 must be set to ON to rectify the faults on the E1 links.
Others
Unavailable
Table 3-30 Description on S4 DIP Switch
DIP Status 1
2
3
4
S4
ON
ON
ON
ON
Supporting E1 bypass
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not supporting E1 bypass
Description
Others
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Unavailable
70
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-31 Description on S5 DIP Switch
DIP Status
Description
1
2
3
4
S5
ON
ON
ON
ON
Not supporting E1 bypass
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass of level-1 cascaded base stations
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass of level-2 cascaded base stations
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass of level-3 cascaded BTSs
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass of level-2 cascaded BTSs
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass of level-5 cascaded BTSs
3.1.7 LMPT The LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system in terms of OM and signaling processing and provides system clock for the BBU3900.
Specifications of the LMPT Table 3-32 lists the specifications of the LMPT. Table 3-32 Specifications of the LMPT
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Board
Mode
Transmissi on Mode
Port
Port Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
LMPT
LTE
Transmissio n over FE/ GE optical ports
2
10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio n over FE/ GE electrical ports
2
10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Panel Figure 3-20 shows the LMPT. Figure 3-20 LMPT
Functions The LMPT performs the following functions: l
Enables configuration management, device management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and radio source management
l
Controls all boards in the system
l
Provides the system clock
l
Enables signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW
Indicators There are three indicators on the LMPT panel. Table 3-33 describes the indicators on the LMPT panel and their status. Table 3-33 Indicators on the LMPT panel Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is functioning properly.
On for 0.125s and l The board is being off for 0.125s loaded or configured. l The board is not started. ALM
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced.
Steady off
The board is running properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
ACT
Green
Status
Description
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
Steady off
l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
On for 0.125s and The OML is disconnected. off for 0.125s In every 4s, the indicator is on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s (eight times) in the first 2s and then off for 2s.
The service is not available.
Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators used for indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, commissioning Ethernet port have no silkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 3-34 describes the indicators. Table 3-34 Indicators Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
SFP0 and SFP1
Green (LINK)
Steady on
The connection is set up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set up.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received.
Orange (ACT)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
ETH
Orange (ACT)
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received.
Steady on
The connection is set up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set up.
Steady on
The connection is set up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set up.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received.
Green (LINK)
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1
Green (LINK)
Orange (ACT)
Ports Table 3-35 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT. Table 3-35 Ports on the panel of the LMPT
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Purpose
SFP0 and SFP1
LC
2
FE/GE optical port connecting to the transmission equipment or gateway equipment
ETH(1)
RJ45 connector
1
Commissioning
TST(2)
USB
1
Test port
USB(3)
USB
1
Software loading
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Purpose
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
2
FE/GE electrical port connecting to the transmission equipment or gateway equipment
GPS
SMA connector
1
GPS port
RST
-
1
Resetting the BBU3900
NOTE
(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port. (2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration. (3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. NOTE
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously. SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously.
3.1.8 WBBP The WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
Specifications of the WBBP The WBBP boards fall into four types, as listed in Table 3-36. NOTE
The WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.
Table 3-36 Specifications of the WBBP
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Board
Number of Cells
Number of UL CEs
Number of DL CEs
WBBPa
3
128
256
WBBPb1
3
64
64
WBBPb2
3
128
128
WBBPb3
6
256
256
WBBPb4
6
384
384
WBBPd1
6
64
64
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
WBBPd2
Number of Cells
6
Number of UL CEs
Number of DL CEs
192
192
256
256
384
384
WBBPd3
6
256
256
WBBPf1
6
192
256
WBBPf2
6
256
384
WBBPf3
6
384
512
WBBPf4
6
512
768
NOTE
There are two CE specifications for the WBBPd1 and WBBPd2 as controlled by the license and parameters.
Panel The WBBP has four types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-21, Figure 3-22, Figure 3-23, and Figure 3-24. Figure 3-21 Panel of the WBBPa
Figure 3-22 Panel of the WBBPb
Figure 3-23 Panel of the WBBPd
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-24 Panel of the WBBPf
Functions The WBBP performs the following functions: l
Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules, and supports CPRI ports in 1 +1 backup mode.
l
Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
l
The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.
l
The WBBPd installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the IC of uplink data.
l
The WBBPf installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the baseband interconnection between BBUs.
Indicators There are three indicators on the panel of the WBBP. Table 3-37 describes the indicators on the WBBP and their status. Table 3-37 Indicators on the panel of the WBBP and their status Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is functioning properly.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started.
ALM
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced.
Steady off
The board is running properly.
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
ACT
Green
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
Steady off
l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The power supply for the board is insufficient. NOTE Of all types of WBBP boards, only the WBBPf has this status.
The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three indicators indicating the status of Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) links, and the indicators are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd or WBBPf provides six indicators indicating the status of SFP links, and the indicators are above the SFP ports. Table 3-38 describes the indicators. Table 3-38 Indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
CPRIx
Red and green
Steady green
The CPRI link is functioning properly.
Steady red
An optical module fails to receive signals because of one of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The RF module connected to the CPRI link has a hardware fault.
78
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The CPRI link is out of lock because of one of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between dualmode clock sources. l There is mismatched data rate over CPRI ports. l VSWR alarms are reported on the RF module on the CPRI link when the USB(1) flash drive is under test.
Steady off
l The optical module cannot be detected. l The CPRI cable is not connected.
NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
The WBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the status of the QSFP link, which is above the QSFP port. Table 3-39 describes the meaning of the indicator. Table 3-39 Indicator indicating the status of the QSFP links
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
HEI
Red and green
Steady green
The inter-BBU transmission link is functional.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Steady red
An optical module fails to receive signals because of one of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The interconnection link is out of lock and the reason is listed as follows: l There is no mutual lock between two interconnected BBUs. l There is mismatched data rate over QSFP ports. The optical module cannot be detected.
Steady off
Ports Table 3-40 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb. Table 3-40 Ports on the WBBPa and WBBPb panels Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRIx
SFP female connector
Data transmission port interconnected to the RF module. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals.
Table 3-41 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-41 Ports on the WBBPd panel Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRI0, CPRI1, CPRI2, CPRI3/ EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1, CPRI5/EIH2
SFP female connector
Data transmission port interconnected to the RF module. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals.
The WBBPf provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port, as listed in Table 3-42. Table 3-42 Ports on the WBBPf panel Silkscreen
SFP Female Connector
Description
CPRIx
SFP female connector
Data transmission port interconnected to the RF module. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals.
HEI
QSFP connector
Port interconnected to other baseband boards to share the baseband resources.
3.1.9 LBBP The LTE baseband processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
Specifications of the LBBP Table 3-43 lists the specifications of the LBBP that is used in the LTE FDD scenario. Table 3-43 Specifications of the LBBP Board
Number of Cells
Cell Bandwidth
Antenna Configuration
LBBPb
3
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz and 10 MHz
1 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz
3 x 10 MHz, 4T4R channel
LBBPc
3
3 x 10 MHz, 2T2R channel
3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel 1 x 20 MHz, 4T4R channel
LBBPd1
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
3
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel
81
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Number of Cells
Cell Bandwidth
Antenna Configuration
LBBPd2
3
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz
3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel 3 x 20 MHz, 4T4R channel
Table 3-44 lists the specifications of the LBBP that is used in the LTE TDD scenario. Table 3-44 Specifications of the LBBP Board
Number of Cells
Cell Bandwidth
Antenna Configuration
LBBPc
3
5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz
3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel 3 x 10 MHz, 4T4R channel 1 x 20 MHz, 8T8R channel
LBBPd1
3
5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz
3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel
LBBPd2
3
5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz
3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel 3 x 20 MHz, 4T4R channel
NOTE
The Antenna Configuration column lists the maximum specifications supported by various types of LBBP. For example, the maximum specification supported by the LBBPc is 3 x 10 MHz, 4T4R channel, then the configurations of 3 x 1.4 MHz, 4T4R channel, of 3 x 3 MHz, 4T4R channel, and of 3 x 5 MHz, 4T4R channel are supported by the LBBPc.
Panel The LBBP has three types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-25, Figure 3-26, and Figure 3-27. Figure 3-25 Panel of the LBBPb
Figure 3-26 Panel of the LBBPc
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-27 Panel of the LBBPd
NOTE
The LBBPb applies only to the LTE FDD scenario, and the LBBPc and LBBPd apply both to the LTE FDD and LTE TDD scenarios.
Functions The LBBP performs the following functions: l
Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
l
Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules.
l
Achieves BBU baseband resource sharing.
Indicators There are three indicators on the panel of the LBBP. Table 3-45 describes the indicators on the LBBP. Table 3-45 Indicators on the panel of the LBBP Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is functioning properly.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started.
ALM
ACT
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Red
Green
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Steady off
The board is running properly.
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Steady off
l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board is not activated. l The board does not provide any services.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The power supply for the board is insufficient. NOTE Of all types of LBBP boards, only the LBBPd has this status.
As listed in Table 3-46, the LBBP provides six indicators indicating the status of the SFP links. The indicators are positioned above the SFP ports. Table 3-46 Indicators indicating the status of the SFP links Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
CPRIx
Red or green
Steady green
The CPRI link is functioning properly.
Steady red
An optical module fails to receive signals because of one of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The RF module connected to the CPRI link has a hardware fault.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The CPRI link is out of lock because of one of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between dualmode clock sources. l The data rates of the CPRI ports do not match each other.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Steady off
l The optical module cannot be detected. l The CPRI cable is not connected.
The LBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the status of the QSFP link, which is above the QSFP port. Table 3-47 describes the meaning of the indicator. Table 3-47 Indicator indicating the status of the QSFP links Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
HEI
Red or green
Steady green
The inter-BBU transmission link is functional.
Steady red
An optical module fails to receive signals because of one of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The interconnection link is out of lock because of one of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between two interconnected BBUs. l The data rates of the QSFP ports do not match each other.
Steady off
The optical module cannot be detected.
Ports Table 3-48 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the LBBP. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-48 Ports on the LBBP Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5
SFP female connector
6
Connects to the RF modules for transmitting service data, clock signals, and synchronization information
Table 3-49 describes the QSFP port on the panel of the LBBPd. Table 3-49 QSFP port on the LBBPd Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Description
HEI
QSFP connector
1
Port interconnected to other baseband boards to share the baseband resources.
3.1.10 FAN The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of the fan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.
Panel The FAN units fall into two types: FAN and FANc, as shown in Figure 3-28 and Figure 3-29. Figure 3-28 FAN
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-29 FANc
NOTE
There is a FANc silkscreen on the FANc while the FAN has no such silkscreen.
Functions The FAN unit performs the following functions: l
Controls the fan speed.
l
Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control processing unit.
l
Monitors the temperature at the air intake vent.
l
Dissipates heat.
l
The FANc provides a read-write electronic label.
Indicator There is only one indicator on the panel of the FAN unit, which indicates the operating status of the fans. Table 3-50 describes the indicator. Table 3-50 Indicator on the panel of the FAN unit
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
STATE
Red or green
Blinking green (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The module is not registered, and no alarm is reported.
Blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is working.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is reporting alarms.
Steady off
There is no power supply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
3.1.11 UPEU The Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC.
Panel The UPEU is classified into four types: Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit Type A (UPEUa), Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit Type B (UPEUb), Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit Type C (UPEUc), and Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit Type D (UPEUd). The UPEUa, UPEUc, and UPEUd convert -48 V DC power into +12 V DC, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC. Figure 3-30, Figure 3-31, Figure 3-32, and Figure 3-33 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, UPEUc, UPEUd, respectively. Figure 3-30 UPEUa panel
(1) BBU power switch
(2) 7W2 connector
Figure 3-31 UPEUb panel
(1) BBU power switch
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
(2) 7W2 connector
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-32 UPEUc panel
(1) BBU power switch
(2) 3V3 connector
Figure 3-33 UPEUd panel
(1) BBU power switch
(2) 3V3 connector
NOTE
The UPEUc and UPEUd have silkscreens "UPEUc" and "UPEUd" indicating their board types on them, respectively, whereas the UPEUa and UPEUb do not have such silkscreens indicating their board types. The UPEUa and UPEUb, however, can be distinguished by the silkscreens "-48 V" and "+24 V" on them.
Functions The UPEU performs the following functions: l
Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC, which is the operating voltage of the boards.
l
Provides two ports with each transmitting one RS485 signal and two ports with each transmitting four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or Open Collector (OC) signals.
Table 3-51 describes the specifications of the UPEU. Table 3-51 Specifications of the UPEU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Board
Output Power
Backup Mode
UPEUa
The output power of a UPEUa is 300 W.
1+1 backup
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Board
Output Power
Backup Mode
UPEUc
The output power of a UPEUc is 360 W, and the output power of two UPEUc boards is 650 W.
1+1 backup
UPEUa+UPEUc
The total output power of a UPEUa and a UPEUc is 360 W.
-
UPEUd
The output power of a UPEUd is 650 W.
1+1 backup
NOTE
After the UPEUc is replaced by the UPEUa, the base station power consumption data monitored by the network management system will change. The power consumption data does not only depend on the output power but also on the data collection method. The UPEUc and UPEUa use different methods for power consumption data collection. Therefore, the decrease in the power consumption shown in the network management system after the UPEUc is replaced by the UPEUa does not necessarily reflect the actual decrease of power consumption.
Indicator The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 3-52 describes the indicator. Table 3-52 Indicator on the UPEU panel Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
The board is functional.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Port The UPEU provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting one RS485 signal, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four Boolean signals. Figure 3-34 shows the slots in the BBU. Figure 3-34 Slots in the BBU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-53 describes the ports on the panel of the UPEU. Table 3-53 Description on the ports Slot
Silkscree n
Connecto r
Quantity
Description
Slot 19
+24 V or -48 V
3V3
1
Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power
EXTALM0
RJ45 connector
1
Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3
EXTALM1
RJ45 connector
1
Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7
MON0
RJ45 connector
1
Port for RS485 input 0
MON1
RJ45 connector
1
Port for RS485 input 1
+24 V or -48 V
3V3
1
Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power
EXTALM0
RJ45 connector
1
Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3
EXTALM1
RJ45 connector
1
Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7
MON0
RJ45 connector
1
Port for RS485 input 0
MON1
RJ45 connector
1
Port for RS485 input 1
Slot 18
3.1.12 UEIU The Universal Environment Interface Unit (UEIU) of the BBU3900 transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.
Panel Figure 3-35 shows the panel of the UEIU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-35 Panel of the UEIU
Functions The UEIU performs the following functions: l
Provides two ports with each transmitting one RS485 signal.
l
Provides two ports with each transmitting four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or OC signals.
l
Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.
Port The UEIU is configured in slot 18 and provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting one RS485 signal, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four Boolean signals. Table 3-54 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU. Table 3-54 Ports on the panel of the UEIU Slot
Silkscre en
Connect or
Quanti ty
Description
Slot 18
EXTALM0
RJ45 connector
1
Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3
EXTALM1
RJ45 connector
1
Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7
MON0
RJ45 connector
1
Port for RS485 input 0
MON1
RJ45 connector
1
Port for RS485 input 1
3.1.13 UTRP The universal transmission processing unit (UTRP) is an extended transmission board in the BBU3900. It provides ports connecting to transmission equipment. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Specifications of the UTRP Table 3-55 describes the specifications of the UTRP. Table 3-55 Specifications of the UTRP Board
Subboard/ Board Type
Applicab le Mode
Transmis sion Mode
Port
Port Capacity
Full/ HalfDuplex
UTRP2
UEOC
UMTS
Transmiss ion over FE/GE optical ports
2
10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/ s, and 1000 Mbit/ s
Fullduplex
UTRP3
UAEC
UMTS
ATM over E1/T1
2
Eight channels
Fullduplex
UTRP4
UIEC
UMTS
IP over E1/ T1
2
Eight channels
Fullduplex
UTRPb4
Without a sub-board
GSM
TDM over E1/T1
2
Eight channels
Fullduplex
UTRPb4
Without a sub-board
LTE
IP over E1/ T1
2
Eight channels
Fullduplex
UTRP6
UUAS
UMTS
STM-1/ OC-3
1
One channel
Fullduplex
UTRP9
UQEC
UMTS
Transmiss ion over FE/GE electrical ports
4
10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/ s, and 1000 Mbit/ s
Fullduplex
UTRPc
Without a sub-board
GSM
Transmiss ion over FE/GE electrical ports
4
10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/ s, and 1000 Mbit/ s
Fullduplex
Transmiss ion over FE/GE optical ports
2
100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s
Fullduplex
UMTS LTE
Panel Figure 3-36 shows the panel of the UTRP2. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-36 Panel of the UTRP2 (with two optical ports)
Figure 3-37 shows the panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4. Figure 3-37 Panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)
Figure 3-38 shows the panel of the UTRPb4 in GSM mode. Figure 3-38 Panel of the UTRPb4 (GSM)
Figure 3-39 shows the panel of the UTRPb4 in LTE mode. Figure 3-39 Panel of the UTRPb4 (LTE)
Figure 3-40 shows the panel of the UTRP6. Figure 3-40 Panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-41 shows the panel of the UTRP9. Figure 3-41 Panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)
Figure 3-42 shows the panel of the UTRPc. Figure 3-42 Panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)
Functions The UTRP performs the following functions: l
Provides extended E1/T1 ports to connect to transmission equipment, supporting ATM, TDM, and IP transmission.
l
Provides electrical and optical transmission ports to connect to transmission equipment.
l
Supports cold backup.
Restriction The GTMUa cannot be used together with the UTRPc.
Indicators Table 3-56 describes the indicators on the UTRP panel. Table 3-56 Indicators on the UTRP panel
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is running properly.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced.
Steady off
The board is running properly.
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
Steady off
l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
The ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode has different status from the ACT indicator on other boards, as listed in Table 3-57.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-57 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
ACT
Green
Steady on
l Before the configuration takes effect, none or both of the two E1 ports in GSM mode are functional. l The configuration has taken effect.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
Before the configuration takes effect, only one E1 port in GSM mode is functional.
Each Ethernet port on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc corresponds to two indicators indicating the status of the current link, as listed in Table 3-58. Table 3-58 Status of the indicators for Ethernet ports on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
LINK
Green
Steady on
The link is connected properly.
Steady off
The link is not connected properly.
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received on the link.
Steady off
No data is being transmitted or received on the link.
ACT
Orange
There are three indicators on the UTRPc: R0, R1, and R2, of which the status is listed in Table 3-59.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-59 Status of indicators on the UTRPc Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
R0
Red or green
Steady off
The board is not working in GSM mode.
Steady green
The board is working in GSM mode.
Steady red
Reserved
Steady off
The board is not working in UMTS mode.
Steady green
The board is working in UMTS mode.
Steady red
Reserved
Steady off
The board is not working in LTE mode.
Steady green
The board is working in LTE mode.
Steady red
Reserved
R1
Red or green
R2
Red or green
NOTE
If multiple indicators are on at the same time, the board works in multiple modes.
Ports Table 3-60 describes the ports on the UTRP2. Table 3-60 Ports on the panel of the UTRP2 (with 2 optical ports) Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
FE/GE optical port
2
SFP connector
The UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 have the same ports, as listed in Table 3-61. Table 3-61 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 (with 8 E1/T1 ports)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
E1/T1 port
E1/T1 port
2
DB26 connector
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-62 lists the ports on the UTRP6. Table 3-62 Ports on the panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel) Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
STM-1/OC-3
STM-1/OC-3
1
SFP connector
Table 3-63 lists the ports on the UTRP9. Table 3-63 Ports on the panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports) Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
FE/GE0 to FE/GE3
FE/GE electrical port
4
RJ45 connector
Table 3-64 describes the ports on the panel of the UTRPc. Table 3-64 Ports on the panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports) Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
FE/GE optical port
2
SFP connector
FE/GE2 to FE/GE5
FE/GE electrical port
4
RJ45 connector
DIP Switch There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9. There are three DIP switches on the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4. SW1 and SW2 are used to set whether to ground the receiver end of the E1 cable, and SW3 is used to set the resistance of the E1 cable. Figure 3-43 shows the DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4. Figure 3-44 shows the DIP switches on the UTRPb4. Figure 3-43 DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-44 DIP switches on the UTRPb4
Table 3-65, Table 3-66, and Table 3-67 list the settings of the DIP switches on the UTRP. Table 3-65 Settings of SW1 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW1
DIP Status
Description
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Unbalanced
Others
Unavailable
Table 3-66 Settings of SW2 on the UTRP DIP Switch
DIP Status 1
2
3
4
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Unbalanced
Description
Others
Unavailable
CAUTION SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to No.4 to No.7 E1 channels. SW2 corresponds to No.0 to No.3 E1 channels.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-67 Settings of SW3 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW3
DIP Status
Description
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
T1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohm.
ON
ON
ON
ON
The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohm.
Others
Unavailable
3.1.14 USCU This section describes the universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU).
Specifications of the USCU The USCU is classified into three types, as shown in Table 3-68. Table 3-68 Specifications of the USCU Board
Mode
Supported Satellite Card
USCUb11
LTE
N/A
USCUb12
GSM
RT single-satellite card
UMTS LTE USCUb21
GSM
K161 dual-satellite card
UMTS LTE NOTE This board is not supported by multi-mode base stations.
Panel There are three types of USCU: USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb21, as shown in Figure 3-45 and Figure 3-46. The USCUb11 and USCUb12 have the same exterior.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-45 USCUb11 and USCUb12 panel
Figure 3-46 USCUb21 panel
(1) GPS port
(2) RGPS port
(3) TOD port
(4) M-1PPS port
(5) BITS port
Functions The USCU has the following functions: l
The USCUb11 provides ports to communicate with the RGPS (for example the reused equipment of the customer) and BITS equipment. It does not support GPS signals.
l
The USCUb12 performs time synchronization or obtains accurate clock signals from the transmission equipment. It does not support RGPS signals.
l
The USCUb21 provides supports ports to communicate with the BITS and TOD equipment. It supports GPS and GLONASS signals but does not support RGPS signals.
Indicators Table 3-69 and Table 3-70 describe the indicators on the USCU. Table 3-69 Indicators on the USCU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is functioning properly.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started.
ALM
Red
ACT
Green
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced.
Steady off
The board is running properly.
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
Steady off
l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
Table 3-70 Indicators for the TOD ports
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Color
Status
Description
Green (on the left)
The green indicator is steady on and the orange indicator is steady off.
The TOD port is configured as an input port.
Orange (on the right)
The orange indicator is steady on and the green indicator is steady off.
The TOD port is configured as an output port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Ports Table 3-71 describes the ports on the USCU. Table 3-71 Ports on the USCU Silkscreen
Connector
Description
GPS
SMA coaxial connector
The GPS ports on the USCUb12 and USCUb21 receive GPS signals. The GPS port on the USCUb11 is reserved. It cannot receive GPS signals.
RGPS port
PCB welded wiring terminal
The RGPS port on the USCUb11 receives RGPS signals. The RGPS ports on the USCUb12 and USCUb21 are reserved. They cannot receive RGPS signals.
TOD0 port
RJ45 connector
Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals.
TOD1 port
RJ45 connector
Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals, and receives TOD signals from the M1000.
BITS port
SMA coaxial connector
Receives BITS clock signals, supports adaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock reference source.
M-1PPS port
SMA coaxial connector
Receives 1PPS signals from the M1000.
3.1.15 UBRI The universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.
Panel Figure 3-47 shows the panel of the UBRI. Figure 3-47 UBRI panel
Functions The UBRI performs the following functions: Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
l
Provides extended CPRI electrical or optical ports.
l
Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.
Indicators Table 3-72 describes the indicators on the UBRI panel. Table 3-72 Indicators on the UBRI panel Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is running properly.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
Software is being loaded to the board.
Steady on
An alarm is generated on the board.
Steady off
The board is running properly.
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
Steady off
l The board does not serve as an active board.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
The UBRI provides six indicators indicating the status of the CRRI links. The indicators are above the SFP ports. Table 3-73 describes the meanings of the indicators. Table 3-73 Indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
CPRIx
Red or green
Steady green
The CPRI link is functioning properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Steady red
An optical module fails to receive signals because of one of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The CPRI link is out of lock because of one of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between dualmode clock sources. l The data rates of the CPRI ports do not match each other.
Steady off
l The optical module cannot be detected. l The CPRI cable is not connected.
Ports Table 3-74 describes the ports on the panel of the UBRI. Table 3-74 Ports on the panel of the UBRI Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5
SFP female connector
6
Connecting the BBU and the RF module
3.1.16 UCIU The universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) interconnects BBUs. It forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU to another.
Panel Figure 3-48 shows the UCIU panel. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-48 UCIU panel
Functions The UCIU performs the following functions: l
Supports single- or multi-mode configuration and management. When in multi-mode, it is shared by multiple modes and can be configured and managed by any mode.
l
Interconnects BBUs and forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU to another.
l
Supports co-site of a 3900 series base station and a 3012 series base station.
l
Supports the connection to a UMPT using a fiber optic cable.
Indicators A UCIU provides one DB15 port, three running indicators, and six SFP+ ports for interconnection, with one double-colored indicator on each port. Table 3-75 describes the indicators on the UCIU panel. Table 3-75 Indicators on the UCIU panel Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The board is running properly.
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started.
ALM
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Steady off
There is no fault.
On for 1s and off for 1s
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
ACT
Green
Steady on
The board serves as an active board.
Steady off
l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
M0 to M4 and S0
Red or green
Steady green
The inter-BBU transmission link is normal.
Steady red
The optical module fails to transmit or receive signals, or the fiber optic cable is faulty.
Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Cables are connected in an incorrect manner. For example: l In the UCIU+UMPT scenario, the S0 port on the UCIU is connected to the CI port on the UMPT. Indicators for the S0 and CI ports are blinking. l The ports are connected in ring topology. Indicators for all incorrectly connected ports are blinking.
Steady off
The optical module cannot be detected.
Ports Table 3-76 describes UCIU ports. Table 3-76 UCIU ports
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
M0 to M4
SFP female connector
Primary inter-BBU ports, which connect to the secondary inter-BBU ports.
S0
SFP female connector
Secondary inter-BBU port, which connects to the primary inter-BBU port.
GCK
DB15 connector
Provides reference clocks when the base station and a 3012 series base station are combined.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
3.2 RRU The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna system. The RRU implements the following functions: l
Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data for the communication between the BBU and the RRU.
l
The RX channel receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the received signals to IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital (A/D) conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog (D/A) conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.
l
Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antenna path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.
For details about various types of RRUs, see the hardware description of the corresponding RRU.
3.3 SLPU The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP, UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
3.3.1 SLPU The SLPU, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 1 U high. Figure 3-49 shows the SLPU. Figure 3-49 SLPU
3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU This section describes the slot assignment rules for the SPLU boards.
Slots of the SLPU Figure 3-50 shows the slots of the SLPU. Figure 3-50 SLPU slots
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU When the SLPU is used as a trunk signal protection unit, a mandatory component, it can be integrated with UELP or UFLP and is installed in the 1 U space in the upper part of the cabinet. Table 3-77 lists the slot assignment rules of the SLPU. Table 3-77 Slot assignment rules for the SLPU Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Remarks
UELP
Optional
4
Slot 0 to slot 3
The UELP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 2, 0, 1, or 3.
UFLP
Optional
1
Slot 3
If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.
When there are not more than 16 dry contacts in the SLPU, the SLPU is used as a monitoring signal protection unit, which is an optional component. In this case, the SLPU is integrated with two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U (44.45 mm or 1.75 in.) space at the bottom of the BBU. Table 3-78 lists the slot assignment rules for the SLPU. Table 3-78 Slot assignment rules for the SLPU Board
Optional or Mandatory
Quantity
Slot
Remarks
USLP2
Optional
2
Slot 2 and slot 3
-
3.3.3 UELP Each universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four paths of E1/T1 signals.
Panel Figure 3-51 shows the panel of the UELP. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-51 UELP panel
Ports Table 3-79 lists the ports on the UELP. Table 3-79 Ports on the UELP panel Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE
DB25 connector
Connecting to a transmission board of the base station.
OUTSIDE
DB26 connector
Connecting to an external transmission device
DIP Switch The UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded. The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 3-52 shows the DIP switch on the UELP. Figure 3-52 DIP switch on the UELP
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-80 describes the DIP switch on the UELP. Table 3-80 DIP switch on the UELP DIP Switch
DIP Status
Description
1
2
3
4
S1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other status
Not grounded Grounded
NOTE
The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cable of 100 ohms cannot be grounded.
3.3.4 UFLP Each universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) provides protection for two channels of FE signals. Each universal FE lightning protection unit type B (UFLPB) provides protection for two FE/GE signals. NOTE
The UFLPB is supported only by LTE.
Panel Figure 3-53 shows the UELP panel. Figure 3-53 UELP panel
Figure 3-54 shows the UFLPB panel. Figure 3-54 UFLPB panel
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Functions The UFLP or UFLPB performs the following function: l
The UFLP provides surge protection for FE signals to protect the base station.
l
The UFLPB provides surge protection for FE/GE signals to protect the base station.
Port Table 3-81 describes UFLP ports. Table 3-81 UFLP ports Port Location
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
FE0 and FE1
RJ45 connector
Connecting to a transmission board of the base station.
OUTSIDE side
FE0 and FE1
RJ45 connector
Connecting to an external transmission device
Table 3-82 describes UFLPB ports. Table 3-82 UFLPB ports Port Location
Silkscreen on the Panel
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
Connecting to a transmission board of the base station.
OUTSIDE side
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
Connecting to an external transmission device
3.3.5 USLP2 The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protection unit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.
Panel Figure 3-55 shows the panel of a USLP2. Figure 3-55 Panel of a USLP2
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Port There are four input ports and two output ports on the USLP2. Table 3-83 lists the ports on the panel of the USLP2. Table 3-83 Ports on the panel of the USLP2 Silkscreen on the Panel
Port Type
Quantity
Description
IN0, IN1, IN2, and IN3
4-pin
4
Input ports, which connect to customized alarm devices
OUT0 and OUT1
RJ45 connector
2
Output ports, which connect to an EXTALM port of the UPEU or UEIU in the cabinet
Figure 3-56 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2. Figure 3-56 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2 OUT0 7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2
OUT1 7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2
IN0 1
2
3
IN1 4
1
2
3
IN2 4
1
2
3
IN3 4
1
2
3
4
Table 3-84 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2. Table 3-84 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2 Input
Output
Silkscreen on the Panel
Pin
Silkscreen on the Panel
Pin
INO
IN0.1
OUT1
OUT1.1
IN0.2 Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OUT1.2 114
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Input
Output
Silkscreen on the Panel
IN1
IN2
IN3
Pin
Silkscreen on the Panel
Pin
IN0.3
OUT1.4
IN0.4
OUT1.5
IN1.1
OUT1.3
IN1.2
OUT1.6
IN1.3
OUT1.7
IN1.4
OUT1.8
IN2.1
OUT0
OUT0.1
IN2.2
OUT0.2
IN2.3
OUT0.4
IN2.4
OUT0.5
IN3.1
OUT0.3
IN3.2
OUT0.6
IN3.3
OUT0.7
IN3.4
OUT0.8
For details about the application of the USLP2, see 3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU.
3.4 WGRU The WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock signals together with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS positioning information. The WGRU is optional. It is installed in a dedicated case. Each base station can be configured with a WGRU.
Exterior Figure 3-57 shows a WGRU. Figure 3-58 shows a WGRU installed in a case.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-57 WGRU
Figure 3-58 WGRU installed in a case
Panel As shown in Figure 3-59, there are indicators, a reset button, and ports on the front panel of the WGRU. As shown in Figure 3-60, there are a power input socket and a GPS signal input port on the rear panel of the WGRU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Figure 3-59 Front panel of a WGRU
Figure 3-60 Rear panel of a WGRU
Indicators on the Front Panel On the front panel of the WGRU, there are three indicators: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 3-85 lists the indicators on the front panel of the WGRU. Table 3-85 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
On for 1s and off for 1s
The WGRU is running properly.
Steady on
There is power supply, but the WGRU suite is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the WGRU suite is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
ALM
Red
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
Steady on
An alarm is reported, indicating a fault during the operation.
Steady on
The WGRU has properly resolved the positioning information.
Steady off
The WGRU fails to properly resolve the positioning information.
ACT
Green
Ports on the Front Panel The ports on the front panel of the WGRU are PPS1, PPS2, COM1, COM2, CLK1, and CLK2. Table 3-86 describes the ports on the front panel of the WGRU. Table 3-86 Ports on the front panel of the WGRU Silkscreen
Port Type
Description
PPS1
RJ45 connector
Outputs PPS signals.
PPS2
RJ45 connector
Reserved
COM1
RJ45 connector
Forwards GPS information and BBU interaction, management, and maintenance information.
COM2
RJ45 connector
Reserved
CLK1
RJ45 connector
Reserved
CLK2
RJ45 connector
Reserved
Ports on the Rear Panel The ports on the rear panel of the WGRU are POWER and ANT. Table 3-87 describes the ports on the rear panel of the WGRU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
DBS3900 Hardware Description
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
Table 3-87 Ports on the rear panel of the WGRU Silkscreen
Connector
Description
POWER
Two-pole male connector
Used to feed external power.
ANT
N-type female connector
Connects to the GPS antenna system.
3.5 EMUA The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet and reports related alarms. The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring the environment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the following items: l
Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke
l
Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor
l
Power distribution
For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
4
DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
About This Chapter This chapter describes the exteriors, structures, specifications, and application scenarios of various DBS3900 cabinets and racks as well as the requirements for equipment in the DBS3900 cabinets. For details about the exterior, functions, specifications, and components of the TP48600A cabinet, see TP48600A-H17B1 User Manual. For details about the exterior, functions, specifications, and components of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T cabinets, see IBBS700D & IBBS700T User Manual. 4.1 Exteriors of DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks To meet the complicated and various environments outdoors, Huawei provides multiple cabinets with different functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are the APM series cabinets (such as APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B), and APM30H (Ver.C)), TMC series cabinets (such as TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C)), battery cabinets (such as the BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T), OMB, IMB03, and IFS06. 4.2 DBS3900 Cabinets This section describes the module or board configurations of DBS3900 cabinets. 4.3 Technical Specifications of the DBS3900 This section describes the technical specifications of various DBS3900 cabinets. 4.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets This section describes the components in various DBS3900 cabinets. 4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment The equipment in the various DBS3900 cabinets must meet the requirements for engineering specifications.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
4.1 Exteriors of DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks To meet the complicated and various environments outdoors, Huawei provides multiple cabinets with different functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are the APM series cabinets (such as APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B), and APM30H (Ver.C)), TMC series cabinets (such as TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C)), battery cabinets (such as the BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T), OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.
Exterior Figure 4-1 shows the exterior of the DBS3900 cabinet.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Figure 4-1 Exteriors of DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
4.2 DBS3900 Cabinets This section describes the module or board configurations of DBS3900 cabinets.
Functions NOTE
For the functions of the DBS3900-supported cabinets, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.B) Product Description, and APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product Description.
The main functions of the DBS3900-supported cabinets are as follows: l
The advanced power module (APM) series cabinets are the power cabinets, which are used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The APM series cabinets provide AC and DC power distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stations used outdoors and also provide space for customer equipment. – The differences between the APM30 and the APM30H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipation and monitoring modes. The APM30 uses breathable film and fans to dissipate heat, and the APM30H (Ver.A) uses heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans to dissipate heat. The APM30 is configured with the APM power monitoring interface unit (APMI) and APM fan monitoring interface unit (AFMU) for environment and power monitoring, and the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the heat exchange unit type A (HEUA) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting. – The differences between the APM30H (Ver.A) and the APM30H (Ver.B) reside in the monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.A) uses the HEUA in the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses the CMUA to perform centralized monitoring. The APM30H (Ver.A) uses the PDU to distribute power, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses the EPS to distribute power. In addition, the APM30H (Ver.B) uses the electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type. – The differences between the APM30H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.B) reside in the monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.C) uses the CMUE in the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses the CMUA to perform centralized monitoring. The APM30H (Ver.C) uses the EPU to distribute power, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses the EPS to distribute power.
l
The transmission cabinet (TMC) series cabinets are the transmission cabinets used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The TMC series cabinets provide DC power distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stations and also provide space for customer equipment. – The differences between the TMC and the TMC11H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipation and monitoring modes. The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.A) and the TMC11H (Ver.B) reside in the monitoring mode. The TMC uses breathable film and fans to dissipate heat, and the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans to dissipate heat. The TMC uses the APMI and AFMU to monitor other components, the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses the HEUA to monitor other components, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses the CMUA and HPMI to monitor other components. In addition, the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses the electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type. – The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.C) and the TMC11H (Ver.B) reside in the monitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses the CMUE in
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report alarms, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses the CMUA to perform centralized monitoring. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses the DCDU-11B to distribute power, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses the DCDU-03B to distribute power. l
Storage battery cabinets are used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The cabinets provide space for storage batteries, which provide long-duration backup power for the distributed base station and separate base station. The difference between the IBBS200D and the IBBS200T resides in the configuration of their functional modules.
l
The outdoor mini box (OMB) applies to the outdoor distributed base stations. It houses the BBU and other customer equipment and supports either AC or DC power input. The indoor mini box (IMB03) applies to indoor distributed base stations. It houses the BBU and other customer equipment and supports either AC or DC power input. The indoor floor installation support (IFS06) applies to indoor distributed base stations. It supports centralized installation of RRUs.
l
The TP48600A is an outdoor power cabinet. It provides AC and DC power distribution functions for distributed base stations and also provides space for customer equipment. The TP48600A houses storage batteries that provide backup power for distributed base stations.
l
The IBBS700D and IBBS700T are outdoor battery cabinets. The cabinets provide space for batteries, which provide long-duration backup power for distributed base stations and separated base stations.
APM The APM is classified into the following types: APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B), and APM30H (Ver.C). Figure 4-2 shows the configurations of various types of APM series cabinets. Figure 4-2 Module configurations of the APM series cabinets
Different types of APM series cabinets use different heat dissipation, power distribution, and monitoring modes, which are supported by various components, as listed in Table 4-1.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
APM30
1
Fan assembly
Mandatory
1
The fan assembly configured with the APMI, AFMU, and fans is installed at the top of the cabinet.
2
PDU
Mandatory
1
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) distributes AC power and DC power.
3
BBU
Mandatory
1
The baseband unit (BBU) is installed in the 2 U space under the PDU.
4
PSU (AC/ DC)
Mandatory
3
The Power Supply Unit (PSU) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It is configured only in the AC cabinet.
5
PMU
Mandatory
1
The Power Monitoring Unit (PMU) is configured only in the AC cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
DBS3900 Hardware Description
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
APM30H (Ver.A)
1
Fan assembly
Mandatory
1
The fan assembly configured with a fan, HEUA, and HPMI is installed at the top of the cabinet.
2
PDU
Mandatory
1
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) distributes AC power and DC power.
3
BBU
Mandatory
1
The baseband unit (BBU) is installed in the 2 U space under the PDU.
4
PSU (AC/ DC)
Mandatory
3
The Power Supply Unit (PSU) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It is configured only in the AC cabinet.
5
PMU
Mandatory
1
The Power Monitoring Unit (PMU) is configured only in the AC cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
APM30H (Ver.B)
1
Fan assembly
Mandatory
1
The fan assembly configured with a fan, HPMI, and CMUA is installed on the top of the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandatory
2
To protect transmission signals, an SLPU configured with the UELP or UFLP is mandatory. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space at the top of the cabinet. To protect monitoring signals, an SLPU configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 boards (USLP2s) can be configured. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space below the BBU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
3
EPS
Mandatory
1
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) distributes AC power and DC power, which is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).
4
BBU
Mandatory
1
The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the EPS, processing baseband signals.
5
PSU (AC/ DC)
Mandatory
3
The Power Supply Unit (PSU) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It is configured only in the AC cabinet.
6
PMU
Mandatory
1
The Power Monitoring Unit (PMU) is configured only in the AC cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
APM30H (Ver.C)
1
Fan assembly
Mandatory
1
The fan assembly configured with a fan, HPMI, and CMUE is installed at the top of the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandatory
2
To protect transmission signals, an SLPU configured with the UELP or UFLP is mandatory. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space at the top of the cabinet. To protect monitoring signals, an SLPU configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 boards (USLP2s) can be configured. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space below the BBU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
3
EPU
Mandatory
1
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) distributes AC power and DC power. It is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.C).
4
BBU
Mandatory
1
The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the EPU, processing baseband signals.
5
PSU (AC/ DC)
Mandatory
3
The Power Supply Unit (PSU) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It is configured only in the AC cabinet.
6
PMU
Mandatory
1
The Power Monitoring Unit (PMU) is configured only in the AC cabinet.
TMC The TMC series cabinets are classified into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) based on different versions. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler. The TMC series cabinets can also be classified into the following two types based on different application scenarios: Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
DBS3900 Hardware Description
l
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
TMC providing space for the transmission equipment, as shown in Figure 4-3. Figure 4-3 TMC series cabinets (1)
l
TMC configured with the BBU in the -48 V DC power supply scenario, as shown in Figure 4-4. Figure 4-4 TMC series cabinets (2)
Different types of TMC cabinets use different heat dissipation and monitoring modes, which are supported by various components, as listed in Table 4-2.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
TMC
1
Fan assembly
Mandatory
1
The fan assembly configured with the APMI, AFMU, and fans is installed at the top of the cabinet.
2
DCDU-03
Mandatory
1
l The TMC is configure d with a DCDU-0 3C when the TMC provides only space for the transmiss ion equipme nt. l The TMC with a built-in BBU is configure d with the DCDU-0 3B in the -48 V DC power supply scenario.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
TMC11H (Ver.A)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
3
BBU
Mandatory
1
The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-03B, processing baseband signals.
1
Fan assembly
Mandatory
1
The fan assembly configured with a fan, HEUA, and HPMI is installed at the top of the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
2
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The TMC11H (Ver.A) is configure d with a DCDU-0 3C when the TMC provides space only for the transmiss ion equipme nt.
1
l The TMC11H (Ver.A) with a built-in BBU is configure d with a DCDU-0 3B in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 3
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
BBU
Mandatory
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-03B, processing baseband signals.
134
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
TMC11H (Ver.B)
1
Fan assembly
Mandatory
1
The fan assembly configured with a fan, HPMI, and CMUA is installed on the top of the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandatory
2
To protect transmission signals, an SLPU configured with the UELP or UFLP is mandatory. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space at the top of the cabinet. To protect monitoring signals, an SLPU configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 boards (USLP2s) can be configured. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space below the BBU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
3
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The TMC11H (Ver.B) is configure d with a DCDU-0 3C when the TMC provides space only for the transmiss ion equipme nt.
1
l The TMC11H (Ver.B) with a built-in BBU is configure d with a DCDU-0 3B in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 4
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
BBU
Mandatory
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-03B, processing baseband signals.
136
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
TMC11H (Ver. C)
1
Fan assembly
Mandatory
1
The fan assembly configured with a fan, HPMI, and CMUE is installed at the top of the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandatory
2
To protect transmission signals, an SLPU configured with the UELP or UFLP is mandatory. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space at the top of the cabinet. To protect monitoring signals, an SLPU configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 boards (USLP2s) can be configured. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space below the BBU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
3
DCDU-11
Mandatory
l The TMC11H (Ver.C) is configure d with a DCDU-1 1C when the TMC provides space only for the transmiss ion equipme nt.
1
l The TMC11H (Ver.C) with a built-in BBU is configure d with a DCDU-1 1B in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 4
BBU
Mandatory
1
The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-11B, processing baseband signals.
BBC/IBBS The battery cabinets are classified into the following types: the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.B), and IBBS200D (Ver.C). Figure 4-5 shows the configurations of various types of the BBC and IBBS cabinets. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Figure 4-5 Module configurations in the BBC and IBBS cabinets
The differences between the BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T reside in the monitoring and heat dissipation module configurations, as listed in Table 4-3. Table 4-3 Functions of the components in the battery cabinets
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
BBC
1
Power supply box for the heating film
Mandatory
1
The power supply box feeds power to the heating film.
2
Ground bar for the cabinet
Mandatory
1
The ground bar is used for the grounding of the components in the cabinet.
3
Storage battery
Mandatory
8
The storage battery provides longduration backup power for a base station.
4
BBC
Mandatory
4
The BBC provides power to storage batteries.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
DBS3900 Hardware Description
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
IBBS200T (Ver.A)
1
TEC
Mandatory
1
The TEC is installed in the protecting hood for the TEC on the front door of the cabinet. The TEC consists of the TEC module, inner air circulation fan, outer air circulation fan, heatdissipation piece, and monitoring board.
2
Transfer terminal for signal cables
Mandatory
1
The transfer terminal block is installed on the inner side of the front door of the cabinet. It consists of four interconnecti on terminals.
3
Transfer terminal for the input power cable for the TEC
Mandatory
1
The transfer terminal is installed on the inner side of the front door of the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
IBBS200D (Ver.B)/ (Ver.C)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
4
Heat insulation foam
Mandatory
1
The heat insulation foam is installed on the left in the cabinet.
5
Storage battery
Mandatory
8
The storage battery provides longduration backup power for a base station.
6
Junction box for the power cable
Mandatory
1
The junction box is installed on the right in the IBBS200T. It consists of the copper bar, circuit breaker for the batteries, and circuit breaker for the TEC.
1
Fan
Mandatory
2
The fan is installed on the front door of the cabinet, dissipating heat in the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
2
CMUA
Mandatory
1
The CMUA provides functions of temperature control, Boolean alarm detection, and ELU identificatio n of the cabinet.
3
Power distribution box
Optional
1
The power distribution box is installed on the upper right side of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or FAN unit and to storage batteries.
4
Storage battery
Mandatory
8
The storage battery provides longduration backup power for a base station.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
DBS3900 Hardware Description
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
IBBS200T (Ver.B)/ (Ver.C)
1
TEC
Mandatory
1
The TEC is installed in the protecting hood for the TEC on the front door of the cabinet. The TEC consists of the TEC module, inner air circulation fan, outer air circulation fan, heatdissipation piece, and monitoring board.
2
CMUA
Mandatory
1
The CMUA provides functions of temperature control, Boolean alarm detection, and ELU identificatio n of the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
3
Power distribution box
Mandatory
8
The power distribution box is installed on the upper right side of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or FAN unit and to storage batteries.
4
Storage battery
Mandatory
1
The storage battery provides longduration backup power for a base station.
OMB Figure 4-6 shows the configurations of OMB cabinets, including the AC and DC OMB cabinets. Figure 4-6 Configuration of the OMB cabinets
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
The AC OMB and DC OMB have different power equipment and use different surge protection methods, which are implemented by different modules, as listed in Table 4-4. Table 4-4 Internal module functions of the OMB cabinets
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
AC OMB
1
HEUA
Mandatory
1
The HEUA provides power to the fan assembly, monitors the status of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the information to the BBU.
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
The BBU is installed in the left 2 U space of the cabinet.
3
AC surge protection box
Mandatory
1
The AC surge protection box provides protection for the AC input power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
DC OMB
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
4
AC/DC power device
Mandatory
1
The AC/DC power equipment converts 220 V AC power input to -48 V DC power output.
1
HEUA
Mandatory
1
The HEUA provides power to the fan assembly, monitors the status of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the information to the BBU.
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
The BBU is installed in the left 2 U space of the cabinet.
3
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
1
The DCDU-03B provides DC power to all components in the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
IMB03 The IMB03 is classified into the AC and DC IMB03, of which the configurations are listed in Figure 4-7. Figure 4-7 Configurations of the IMB03 cabinets
The AC IMB03 and DC IMB03 have different power equipment, as listed in Table 4-5. Table 4-5 Internal module functions of the IMB03 cabinets
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
AC IMB03
1
AC/DC power device
Mandatory
1
The AC/DC power equipment converts 220 V AC power input to -48 V DC power output.
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
The BBU is installed in the right 2 U space of the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
DC IMB03
1
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
1
The DCDU-03B provides DC power to all components in the cabinet.
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
The BBU is installed in the right 2 U space of the cabinet.
TP48600A The TP48600A supports AC power input. Figure 4-8 shows the cabinet configurations. Figure 4-8 Configurations of the TP48600A
Table 4-6 lists the module configurations in the TP48600A.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-6 Internal module functions of the TP48600A Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
TP48600A
1
FAU02D-07
Mandatory
The FAU02D-07 is a fan assembly used for the equipment compartmen t. It consists of two fans and a Central Monitoring Unit type F (CMUF). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
1
The FAU02D-07 is shortened to FAU in this document. 2
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
CCU
Mandatory
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
The Cabinet Control Unit (CCU) monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and controls devices.
149
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
3
SLPU
Mandatory
1
To protect transmission signals, an SLPU configured with the UELP or UFLP is mandatory. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space at the top of the cabinet.
4
ETP
Mandatory
1
The embedded telecommuni cation power (ETP) system converts AC power into DC power and supplies power to devices inside the cabinet. The ETP consists of the ETP subrack, PMU, and PSUs.
5
R4850G2
Mandatory
7
The R4850G2 converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It is shortened to PSU in this document.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
6
PMU 10A
Mandatory
The Power Monitoring Unit 10A (PMU 10A) manages the power system, charges or discharges the batteries, and reports related alarms.
1
It is shortened to PMU in this document.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
7
DCDU-11C
Mandatory
1
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-11C (DCDU-11C ) provides ten DC outputs for the BBU, CCU, and Central Monitoring Unit type F (CMUF) in the cabinet.
8
BBU
Mandatory
2
The baseband processing unit (BBU3900), which processes baseband signals, is installed under the DCDU-11C.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
9
DCDU-11B/ DCDU-03B
Mandatory
2
The DCDU-11B/ DCDU-03B feeds DC power into RRUs. When only one DCDU-11B/ DCDU-03B is configured, it is preferentiall y configured in the left slot.
10
PDU05A-3
Mandatory
1
The PDU05A-3 provides AC power for the ETP.
11
Storage battery
Optional
8
The storage battery provides backup power for a base station.
12
CMUF
Mandatory
1
The Central Monitoring Unit type F (CMUF) provides the following functions: heat exchanger control, fan speed adjustment, and ELU identificatio n.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Cabinet Type
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Maximum Mandatory Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
13
HAU
Optional
2
The Heater Assembly Unit (HAU) ensures that components in the cabinet work in a proper temperature scope when the surrounding temperature is low. It is optional.
14
Fan
Mandatory
3
Fans dissipate heat from a cabinet.
15
Space for customer equipment
-
-
The space for customer equipment is 5 U. It is provided for the SLPU, EMUA, and transmission equipment.
16
Document holder
Mandatory
1
The holder stores documents.
4.3 Technical Specifications of the DBS3900 This section describes the technical specifications of various DBS3900 cabinets.
Technical specifications of the APM, TMC, and battery cabinets For the technical specifications of the APM30, TMC, and BBC, see Engineering Specifications of the APM30.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
For the technical specifications of the APM30H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.A), and IBBS200T (Ver.A), see Engineering Specifications of the APM30H. For the technical specifications of the APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.B), see Engineering Specifications of the APM30H, IBBS200T, IBBS200D, and TMC11H. For the technical specifications of the APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.C), see Specifications of the APM30H, Specifications of the TMC11H, Specifications of the IBBS200D, and Specifications of the IBBS200T.
Engineering Specifications of the OMB Table 4-7 lists the engineering specifications of the OMB. Table 4-7 Engineering specifications of the OMB Item
Specifications
Dimensions
600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45 in. x 15.35 in.) (H x W x D)
Weight
OMB subrack: ≤ 15 kg (33.08 lb) AC OMB: ≤ 25 kg (55.13 lb) DC OMB: ≤ 22.5 kg (49.61 lb)
Ambient temperature
Without solar radiation: -40oC to +50oC (-104oF to +122oF) Short-term working at +50oC to +55oC (+122oF to +131oF) NOTE The short-term work indicates that the continuous work does not exceed 96 hours or the accumulated working time in a year does not exceed 15 days.
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
Engineering Specifications of the IMB03 Table 4-8 lists the engineering specifications of the IMB03. Table 4-8 Engineering specifications of the IMB03
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions
560 mm x 425 mm x 180 mm (22.05 in. x 16.73 in. x 7.09 in.) (H x W x D)
Weight
10 kg (22.05 lb)
Ambient temperature
-20oC to +50oC to (-68oF to +122oF)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
4.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets This section describes the components in various DBS3900 cabinets.
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinets This section describes the components in the APM, TMC, and battery cabinets. For the components in the APM30, TMC, and battery cabinets, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide. For the components in the APM30H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.A), and battery cabinets, see the APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide. For the components in the APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), and battery cabinets, see the APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.B) User Guide. For the components in the APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), and battery cabinets, see the APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.C) User Guide.
4.4.2 Components in the OMB This section describes the components in the OMB configured for the DBS3900.
HEUA The Heat Exchange Unit Type A (HEUA) monitors the fans and reports the related alarms.
Structure The HEUA is the heat exchange monitoring unit. Figure 4-9 shows the HEUA. Figure 4-9 HEUA
Ports Figure 4-10 shows the ports on the HEUA, and Table 4-9 describes the ports on the HEUA.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Figure 4-10 Ports on the HEUA
Table 4-9 Ports on the HEUA SN
Port
Quantity
Function
1
3V3 power supply port
1
Leading DC input power to the HEUA
2 and 3
4-pin sockets
2
Providing the terminals for the power or alarm signals of the two outer air circulation fans
4
LEDs
2
Indicating the running status and alarm status of the fans
5 and 6
RJ45 ports
2
two RS485 signals l COM OUT: connecting to the PMU or lowerlevel HEUA l COM IN: connecting to the BBU or upperlevel HEUA
7
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Short-circuiting cap
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Differentiating the APM30H or TMC11H from other cabinets
156
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
SN
Port
Quantity
Function
8 and 9
4-pin sockets
2
Providing the terminals for the power or alarm signals of the two inner air circulation fans
AC/DC Power Equipment The AC/DC power equipment consists of a 4815 power system and a DC power distribution box with two outputs. The equipment leads 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, converts the 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supplies -48 V DC power to the components in the cabinet.
Exterior Figure 4-11 shows the AC/DC power equipment. Figure 4-11 AC/DC power equipment
(1) AC power supply socket
(2) Wiring terminal for the RRU
(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment
(4) Power switch for the RRU
(5) Power switch for the transmission equipment
(6) PSU
(7) Monitoring ports
(8) DC output port (LOAD1)
(9) DC output port (LOAD2)
(10) Output port (BATT) for the batteries
Port Table 4-10 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-10 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment Port Type
Label
Description
Connector
AC power supply socket
INPUT
AC input port
3-pin male connector
Monitoring port
RS232
Reserved
-
RS485
Monitoring port for the PSU
RJ45 connector
COM
Reserved
-
LOAD1
Power port (10 A) for the BBU and HEUA
H4
LOAD2
Power port (20 A) for the transmission equipment
H4
BAT
Power port (20 A) for the batteries
H4
RRU
Wiring terminal for feeding power (12 A) into the RRU power cable
OT terminal
TM
Wiring terminal for feeding power (4 A) into the transmission equipment
OT terminal
DC output port
DC output wiring terminals
Indicator Table 4-11 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment. Table 4-11 Indicators on the panel of the PSU Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status indicator
Steady on
The module is running properly.
Steady off
An error occurs during the running of the module.
Alarm indicator
Steady on
An output overcurrent alarm or overtemperature alarm is generated.
Blinking
The communication is interrupted.
Steady off
The module is running properly.
Steady on
A fan fault, output overvoltage, or external short circuit occurs.
Steady off
The module is running properly.
ALARM
FAULT
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Yellow
Red
Fault indicator
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-12 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power equipment. Table 4-12 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status indicator
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is running properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The module is functional but unable to communicate with the PMU properly.
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No alarms is generated.
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
DIP Switch Figure 4-12 shows the DIP switches. Figure 4-12 DIP Switches
Table 4-13 describes the settings of the DIP switches.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-13 Settings of the DIP switches No.
Function
Setting
1 to 5
Used to define the communication address of the PMU.
(1) 1 to 5 correspond to Bit0 to Bit4, respectively. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0. For example, if the communication address of the PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are set to ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are set to OFF. (2) The default settings are as follows: 1 (Bit0) is set to ON; 2 (Bit1) is set to ON; 3 (Bit2) is set to OFF; 4 (Bit3) is set to OFF; 5 (Bit4) is set to OFF.
6
Selects a baud rate for communicating with the main control unit.
When 6 is set to ON, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 is set to OFF, the baud rate is 19200 bit/s.
7 and 8
Reserved and undefined.
7 and 8 are set to OFF.
Specifications Table 4-14 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment. Table 4-14 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment Item
Specifications
Input voltage
220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC 110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
Frequency of the input voltage
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Output current
15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power 7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Item
Specifications
Surge protection capability
2 kV in differential mode 4 kV in common mode
AC Surge Protection Box The AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power.
Exterior Figure 4-13 shows the panel of the AC surge protection box. Figure 4-13 Panel of the AC surge protection box
(1) Alarm port
(2) Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables
Port Table 4-15 describes the ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-15 Ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box Name
Label
Description
Connector
Alarm port
SPD ALM
Port for reporting the AC input surge protection alarm
(2) 2-Pin cord end terminal
Wiring terminals for the input power cables
L
Wiring terminal for the AC input power cable
OT terminal
N PE
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to each component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and application scenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.
Exterior Figure 4-14 shows the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C. Figure 4-14 DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Functions The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and separated base stations. Table 4-16 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-16 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C DCDU Model
DC Output Terminal
Power Consumpti on Equipment
circuit breaker Specificati on
circuit breaker Quantity
Applicatio n Scenario
DCDU-03B
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU
20 A
6
LOAD6 to LOAD8
BBU and the transmission equipment of the customer
12 A
3
Distributed base station/ Mini base station
LOAD0 to LOAD5
Transmissio n equipment of the customer
12 A
6
LOAD6
BBU
12 A
1
LOAD7
Transmissio n equipment of the customer
6A
1
LOAD8
Fan box
6A
1
DCDU-03C
Separated macro base station in the -48 V DC power supply/ Transmissio n cabinet
Ports Figure 4-15 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Figure 4-15 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Table 4-17 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C. Table 4-17 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Port
Specification
Power Cable CrossSectional Area
Remarks
DC input terminal
Supports the M6 2-hole OT terminal (one input)
Maximum = 25mm2, default = 16mm2,
When the DCDU-03C is used in the transmission cabinet, the cross-sectional area of the input power cable is 4 mm2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Port
Specification
Power Cable CrossSectional Area
Remarks
DC output terminal
Supports the M4 single hole OT terminal (9 outputs)
Maximum = 6mm2
l The specification for a power cable depends on the device to which the cable is connected. For example, the specification for a fan power cable is 2.5 mm2. l Three rows of wiring terminals for outputs: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND, where, the last three pairs of the PGND wiring terminals support the grounding of the M4 2hole OT terminals, which are marked in red in Figure 4-15
4.4.3 Components in the IMB03 This section describes the components in the IMB03 configured for the DBS3900.
AC/DC Power Equipment The AC/DC power equipment consists of a 4815 power system and a DC power distribution box with two outputs. The equipment leads 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, converts the 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supplies -48 V DC power to the components in the cabinet.
Exterior Figure 4-16 shows the AC/DC power equipment. Figure 4-16 AC/DC power equipment
(1) AC power supply socket
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
(2) Wiring terminal for the RRU
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment
(4) Power switch for the RRU
(5) Power switch for the transmission equipment
(6) PSU
(7) Monitoring ports
(8) DC output port (LOAD1)
(9) DC output port (LOAD2)
(10) Output port (BATT) for the batteries
Port Table 4-18 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment. Table 4-18 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment Port Type
Label
Description
Connector
AC power supply socket
INPUT
AC input port
3-pin male connector
Monitoring port
RS232
Reserved
-
RS485
Monitoring port for the PSU
RJ45 connector
COM
Reserved
-
LOAD1
Power port (10 A) for the BBU and HEUA
H4
LOAD2
Power port (20 A) for the transmission equipment
H4
BAT
Power port (20 A) for the batteries
H4
RRU
Wiring terminal for feeding power (12 A) into the RRU power cable
OT terminal
TM
Wiring terminal for feeding power (4 A) into the transmission equipment
OT terminal
DC output port
DC output wiring terminals
Indicator Table 4-19 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment. Table 4-19 Indicators on the panel of the PSU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status indicator
Steady on
The module is running properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Label
ALARM
FAULT
Color
Yellow
Red
Name
Alarm indicator
Fault indicator
Status
Description
Steady off
An error occurs during the running of the module.
Steady on
An output overcurrent alarm or overtemperature alarm is generated.
Blinking
The communication is interrupted.
Steady off
The module is running properly.
Steady on
A fan fault, output overvoltage, or external short circuit occurs.
Steady off
The module is running properly.
Table 4-20 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power equipment. Table 4-20 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status indicator
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is running properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The module is functional but unable to communicate with the PMU properly.
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No alarms is generated.
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
DIP Switch Figure 4-17 shows the DIP switches. Figure 4-17 DIP Switches
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-21 describes the settings of the DIP switches. Table 4-21 Settings of the DIP switches No.
Function
Setting
1 to 5
Used to define the communication address of the PMU.
(1) 1 to 5 correspond to Bit0 to Bit4, respectively. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0. For example, if the communication address of the PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are set to ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are set to OFF. (2) The default settings are as follows: 1 (Bit0) is set to ON; 2 (Bit1) is set to ON; 3 (Bit2) is set to OFF; 4 (Bit3) is set to OFF; 5 (Bit4) is set to OFF.
6
Selects a baud rate for communicating with the main control unit.
When 6 is set to ON, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 is set to OFF, the baud rate is 19200 bit/s.
7 and 8
Reserved and undefined.
7 and 8 are set to OFF.
Specifications Table 4-22 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment. Table 4-22 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment Item
Specifications
Input voltage
220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC 110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Frequency of the input voltage
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Item
Specifications
Output current
15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power 7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power
Surge protection capability
2 kV in differential mode 4 kV in common mode
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to each component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and application scenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.
Exterior Figure 4-18 shows the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C. Figure 4-18 DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Functions The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and separated base stations. Table 4-23 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-23 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C DCDU Model
DC Output Terminal
Power Consumpti on Equipment
circuit breaker Specificati on
circuit breaker Quantity
Applicatio n Scenario
DCDU-03B
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU
20 A
6
LOAD6 to LOAD8
BBU and the transmission equipment of the customer
12 A
3
Distributed base station/ Mini base station
LOAD0 to LOAD5
Transmissio n equipment of the customer
12 A
6
LOAD6
BBU
12 A
1
LOAD7
Transmissio n equipment of the customer
6A
1
LOAD8
Fan box
6A
1
DCDU-03C
Separated macro base station in the -48 V DC power supply/ Transmissio n cabinet
Ports Figure 4-19 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Figure 4-19 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Table 4-24 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C. Table 4-24 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Port
Specification
Power Cable CrossSectional Area
Remarks
DC input terminal
Supports the M6 2-hole OT terminal (one input)
Maximum = 25mm2, default = 16mm2,
When the DCDU-03C is used in the transmission cabinet, the cross-sectional area of the input power cable is 4 mm2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Port
Specification
Power Cable CrossSectional Area
Remarks
DC output terminal
Supports the M4 single hole OT terminal (9 outputs)
Maximum = 6mm2
l The specification for a power cable depends on the device to which the cable is connected. For example, the specification for a fan power cable is 2.5 mm2. l Three rows of wiring terminals for outputs: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND, where, the last three pairs of the PGND wiring terminals support the grounding of the M4 2hole OT terminals, which are marked in red in Figure 4-19
4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment The equipment in the various DBS3900 cabinets must meet the requirements for engineering specifications. The equipment installed in the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), TMC, and TMC11H (Ver.A) must meet the following requirements for engineering specifications: l
Dimensions (as shown in Figure 4-20) – Width: 19 inches – Depth: less than or equal to 310 mm (12.2 in.) for the equipment using natural ventilation or dissipating heat out from its left and right; less than 280 mm (11.02 in.) for the equipment dissipating heat out from its front and rear. – Cabling space in front of the front panel: less than or equal to 70 mm (2.76 in.)
l
Requirement for air vents: – If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to back. – If the customer equipment supports natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.
l
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Requirement for temperature:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Table 4-25 Temperature requirements for user equipment Highest Environmental Temperature
Lowest Operating Temperature of the User Equipment
Highest Operating Temperature of the User Equipment
Equal to or lower than 40° C
Equal to or lower than -10° Equal to or higher than 55° C C
Higher than 40°C
Equal to or lower than -10° Equal to or higher than 60° C C
Figure 4-20 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment
(1) Equipment using natural ventilation
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out (3) Equipment dissipating heat out from its left and right from its front and rear
The equipment installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) must meet the following requirements for engineering specifications: l
Dimensions (as shown in Figure 4-20) – Width: 19 inch – Depth: less than or equal to 280 mm (11.02 in.) for the equipment using natural ventilation or dissipating heat out from its left and right; less than 250 mm (9.84 in.) for the equipment dissipating heat out from its front and rear. – Cabling space in front of the front panel: less than or equal to 100 mm (3.94 in.)
l
Requirement for air vents: – If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to back.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
DBS3900 Hardware Description
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
– If the customer equipment supports natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation. l
Requirement for temperature: Table 4-26 Temperature requirements for user equipment Highest Environmental Temperature
Lowest Operating Temperature of the User Equipment
Highest Operating Temperature of the User Equipment
Equal to or lower than 40° C
Equal to or lower than -10° Equal to or higher than 55° C C
Higher than 40°C
Equal to or lower than -10° Equal to or higher than 60° C C
Figure 4-21 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment
(1) Equipment using natural ventilation
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out (3) Equipment dissipating heat out from its left and right from its front and rear
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
5
DBS3900 Power System
About This Chapter The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to -48 V DC power for the base station. Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 list the input voltage ranges supported by the DBS3900. Table 5-1 Applicable AC input voltage ranges Power Input Type
Rated Voltage
Working Voltage
220 V AC single-phase
200 V AC to 240 V AC
176 V AC to 290 V AC
220/380 V AC three-phase
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
110 V AC dual-live-wire
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
Table 5-2 -48 V DC input voltage range Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Table 5-3 +24 V DC input voltage range
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
+24 V DC
+21.6 V DC to +29 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables This section describes the requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in various DBS3900 cabinets. 5.2 Power Distribution Schemes This section describes the power distribution schemes for various DBS3900 cabinets in the power supply scenarios such as 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables This section describes the requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in various DBS3900 cabinets.
5.1.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/ APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base station, which means the full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum configurations of cabinet combinations. The power requirements for the customer equipment in the cabinet are also included. When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supply in the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are listed in Table 5-4. Table 5-4 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) Power Supply
Requirement for the Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1 x 32 A (Using the one-level magnetic circuit breaker)
4mm2 (0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
220 V AC threephase
1 x 20 A (Using the three-level magnetic circuit breaker)
2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1 x 32 A (Using the two-level magnetic circuit breaker)
4mm2 (0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supply in the TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are listed in Table 5-5.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-5 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) Power Supply
Requirement for the Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1 x 63 A, maximum: 1 x 80 A (all using the onelevel magnetic circuit breaker)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet This section lists the recommended configurations of the circuit breakers and power cables for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base station, which means the full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum configurations of cabinet combinations. The power requirements for the customer equipment in the cabinet are also included. When the DBS3900 is in the outdoor scenario with AC power supply and the BBU3900 is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are listed in Table 5-6. Table 5-6 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Power Supply
Requirement for the Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1 x 50 A (using the one-level magnetic blast breaker)
6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1 x 50 A (using the two-level magnetic blast breaker)
220 V AC threephase
1 x 25 A (using the three-level magnetic blast breaker)
2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
When the DBS3900 is in the outdoor scenario with AC power supply and the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are listed in Table 5-7. Table 5-7 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the APM30H (Ver.C) Power Supply
Requirement for the Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1 x 63 A (using the one-level magnetic blast breaker)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1 x 63 A (using the two-level magnetic blast breaker)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
220 V AC threephase
1 x 25 A (using the three-level magnetic blast breaker)
4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
When the DBS3900 is in the outdoor scenario with DC power supply and the BBU is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are listed in Table 5-8. Table 5-8 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the TMC11H (Ver.B) Power Supply
Requirement for the Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1 x 63 A, maximum: 1 x 80 A (all using the onelevel magnetic circuit breaker)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
When the DBS3900 is in the outdoor scenario with DC power supply and the BBU is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are listed in Table 5-9.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-9 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the TMC11H (Ver.C) Maximum Configuration (1)
Minimum Specification of the Circuit Breakers on the Customer Equipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
1 x 80 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of ≤ 10 m (32.81 ft) DC input power cables
1 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
1 x 160 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2 x 80 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables(7)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power < 560 W)
1 x 80 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1 x 100 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
(2)(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power < 300 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Maximum Configuration (1)
Minimum Specification of the Circuit Breakers on the Customer Equipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
(power ≤ 350 W) (6)
2 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables(7)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power < 400 W)
1 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
1 x 100 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
1 x 160 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables(7)
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power < 560 W)
1 x 160 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
(2)(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Maximum Configuration (1) (2)(3)
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
Minimum Specification of the Circuit Breakers on the Customer Equipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
2 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables(7)
Length of the Input Power Cable
NOTE
(1) When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of the circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs. (2) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers is based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the circuit breakers are configured according to the onsite situation, the circuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion. (3) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured. (4) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smaller configurations. (5) The circuit breakers that meet a load meet the requirements for all scenarios with a relatively smaller load. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order as follows: 160 A > 2 × 80 A > 2 × 63 A > 100 A > 80 A > 63 A (6) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the current corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the current required for the circuit breakers that support 350 W. (7) When two groups of power inputs are used, the two groups of power inputs must meet the following requirements: l
Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.
l
To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs and then turn on the circuit breakers for all TRX modules in the base station. To power off the base station, first turn off the circuit breakers for all TRX modules and then turn off the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs.
When the DBS3900 is installed in the outdoor scenario with DC power supply, a heater must be installed in the TMC series cabinets. In this case, one more AC power input must be added, and the recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables are listed in Table 5-10.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the heater Power Supply
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker on Customer Equipment
Description of Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase power
1 x 10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (39.37 ft.)
When the DBS3900 is in the outdoor scenario with +24 V DC power supply and the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are listed in Table 5-11. Table 5-11 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the APM30H (Ver.B) Power Supply
Requirement for the Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
+24 V DC
Minimum: 1 x 160 A, maximum: 2 x 100 A
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
5.1.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or IMB03 This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the OMB or IMB03 cabinet. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base station, which means the full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum configurations of cabinet combinations. The power requirements for the customer equipment in the cabinet are also included. When the DBS3900 is in the AC power supply scenario and the BBU is installed in the OMB or IMB03, the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are listed in Table 5-12.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-12 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the OMB or IMB03 cabinet Power Supply
Requirement for the Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1 x 10 A
4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
When the BBU is supplied with power from the customer equipment, the circuit breakers on the customer equipment should be of 15 A to 25 A. When the DBS3900 uses the DCDU-03B in the DC power supply scenario, the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are listed in Table 5-13. Table 5-13 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables when the DCDU-03B is used in the DC power supply scenario Power Supply
Requirement for the Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1 x 63 A, maximum: 1 x 80 A (all using the onelevel magnetic circuit breaker)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
When the DBS3900 installed indoors uses the DCDU-11B in the DC power supply scenario, the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are listed in Table 5-14.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-14 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables when the DCDU-03B is used in the indoor DC power supply scenario Maximum Configuration (1)
Minimum Specification of the Circuit Breakers on the Customer Equipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
1 x 80 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of ≤ 10 m (32.81 ft) DC input power cables
1 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
1 x 160 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2 x 80 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables(7)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power < 560 W)
1 x 80 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1 x 100 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
(2)(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power < 300 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Maximum Configuration (1)
Minimum Specification of the Circuit Breakers on the Customer Equipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
(power ≤ 350 W) (6)
2 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables(7)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power < 400 W)
1 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
1 x 100 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
1 x 100 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables(7)
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power < 560 W)
1 x 160 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
(2)(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Maximum Configuration (1) (2)(3)
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power ≤ 350 W) (6)
Minimum Specification of the Circuit Breakers on the Customer Equipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
2 x 63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables(7)
Length of the Input Power Cable
NOTE
(1) When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of the circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs. (2) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers is based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the circuit breakers are configured according to the onsite situation, the circuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion. (3) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured. (4) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smaller configurations. (5) The circuit breakers of a load meet the requirements for a relatively smaller load. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order as follows: 160 A > 2 × 80 A > 2 × 63 A > 100 A > 80 A > 63 A (6) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the current corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the current required for the circuit breakers that support 350 W. (7) When two groups of power inputs are used, the two groups of power inputs must meet the following requirements: l
Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.
l
To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs and then turn on the circuit breakers for all TRX modules in the base station. To power off the base station, first turn off the circuit breakers for all TRX modules and then turn off the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs.
5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the TP48600A cabinet. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for the customer equipment in the cabinet are also included. Table 5-15 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the TP48600A cabinet. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-15 Recommended configurations of AC input circuit breakers and power cables Power Supply
Product Configuration
Requirement for the Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment
CrossSectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
7 PSUs+1 SOU
63 A/3 P(1) (recommended)
10 mm2 (0.015 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft.)
4 to 6 PSUs+1 SOU
40 A/3 P
4 to 7 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU
63 A/3 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P (recommended)
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft.)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/1 P
6 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
125 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
100 A/1 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P (recommended)
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft.)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/2 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/2 P
220 V AC single-phase
110 V AC duallive-wire
NOTE
(1) P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
5.2 Power Distribution Schemes This section describes the power distribution schemes for various DBS3900 cabinets in the power supply scenarios such as 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
5.2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/ APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the APM30/ APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario When the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) uses 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the power distribution unit (PDU) in the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) converts AC power into DC power. The PDU converts one AC power input into two AC outputs and ten DC outputs. Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2show the power distribution schemes for the APM30 in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-16 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. NOTE
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be connected in series using a short-circuiting strip. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 5-1 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario
Figure 5-2 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-16 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Figure 5-3 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario
Figure 5-4 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario
Table 5-16 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30/APM30H (Ver.B) in the AC power supply scenario
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Power Supply
Specifications of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers for the PDU
Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses
220 V AC singlephase/three-phase
3 x 16 A (MCB1)
l Heater: 1 x 10 A
l RRU: 6 × 20 A l BBU: 1 × 12 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Power Supply
Specifications of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers for the PDU
Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses
110 V AC dual-livewire
2 x 30 A (MCB)
l Heating film: 1 x 10 A
l FAN: 1 × 12 A l TM2: 2 × 4 A
NOTE
(1) Miniature circuit breaker (MCB) (2) TM: Transmission equipment
When the DBS3900 uses AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission device, fan box, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution box, as shown in Figure 5-5. Figure 5-5 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Table 5-17 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply Table 5-17 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers
APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) + Transmission cabinet
220 V AC
l Transmission equipment: 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1 x 6 A (MCB) l FAN: 1 x 6 A (MCB)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Power Distribution Scheme in the -48V DC Power Supply Scenario When the DBS3900 is supplied with -48 V DC power, the external power is supplied to the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A), and forwarded to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution box. Figure 5-6 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A). Table 5-18 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A). Figure 5-6 Power distribution scheme for the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DC power supply scenario
Table 5-18 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DC power supply scenario Cabinet Type
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers
TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A)
l RRU0 to RRU5: 6 × 20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1 x 12 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
5.2.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the AC power is converted into DC power by the EPS or EPU and distributed to components in the cabinet. After going through the EPS or EPU, an AC power input is divided into two AC power outputs: l Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
One output provides AC power for the Service Outlet Unit (SOU). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
DBS3900 Hardware Description
l
5 DBS3900 Power System
One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, BBU, RRU, and other base station equipment. NOTE
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be connected in series using a short-circuiting bar. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-19 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Figure 5-7 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the 220 V AC three-phase power supply
Figure 5-8 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the 110 V AC dual-live power supply
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-19 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply Power Supply
Specifications of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers of the EPS
Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses
220 V AC singlephase/three-phase
3 x 16 A (MCB(1))
l Heater, Service Outlet Unit (SOU): 1 × 16 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1 x 40 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1 × 16 A (MCB)
l BAT(2): 1 × 100 A (MCB) l RRU: 6 x 20 A (MCB) l TMC: 1 x 25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1 x 15 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU: 2 x 15 A (FUSE)
l Service Outlet Unit (SOU): 1 × 16 A (MCB)
l TEC(4): 1 x 15 A (FUSE) l TEC(5): 4 x 15 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: storage battery (3) FUSE: fuse (4) TM: transmission equipment
Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-20 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Figure 5-9 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the 220 V AC three-phase power supply
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Figure 5-10 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the 110 V AC dual-live power supply
Table 5-20 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply Power Supply
Specifications of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers of the EPS
Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses
220 V AC singlephase/three-phase
3 x 20 A (MCB)
l Heater, Service Outlet Unit (SOU): 1 × 15A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1 x 63 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1 × 15 A (MCB)
l BAT: 1 x 160 A (MCB) l RRU: 6 x 25 A (MCB) l TMC: 1 x 30 A (MCB) l FAN: 1 x 15 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU: 2 x 25 A (FUSE) l TEC: 1 x 15 A (FUSE) l TM: 4 x 15 A (FUSE)
l Service Outlet Unit (SOU): 1 × 15 A (MCB)
When the APM30H (Ver.B) uses AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission device, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution box, as shown in Figure 5-11.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Figure 5-11 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Table 5-21 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply Table 5-21 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply Cabinet Type
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers
Transmission cabinet
l Transmission equipment: 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1 x 6 A (MCB) l FAN: 1 x 6 A (MCB)
When the APM30H (Ver.C) uses AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission device, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution box, as shown in Figure 5-12. Figure 5-12 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Table 5-22 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-22 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC power supply Cabinet Type
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers
Transmission cabinet
l Transmission equipment: 2 x 6 A (MCB) + 2 x 12 A (MCB) + 4 x 25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1 x 25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B), and the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.B) can provide DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fan assembly. Figure 5-13 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC11H (Ver.B). Table 5-23 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B). Figure 5-13 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC power supply scenario
Table 5-23 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC power supply scenario Cabinet Type
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers
TMC11H (Ver.B)
l RRU0 to RRU5: 6 × 20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1 x 12 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 1 x 12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1 x 25 A (MCB)
When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C), and the DCDU-11B in the TMC11H (Ver.C) can provide DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fan assembly. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Figure 5-14 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 5-24 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 5-14 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power supply scenario
Table 5-24 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power supply scenario Cabinet Type
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers
TMC11H (Ver. C)
l RRU0 to RRU5: 6 × 25 A (MCB) l BBU: 2 x 25 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 1 x 25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1 x 25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario When the DBS3900 is supplied with +24 V DC power, the +24 V DC power is converted to -48 V DC power by the DC/DC power system in the APM30H (Ver.B) and forwarded to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B provides power supply for the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, transmission equipment, and other components. Figure 5-15 shows the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 5-25 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B). Figure 5-15 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-25 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario Cabinet Type
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers
APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)
l RRU0 to RRU5: 6 × 20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1 x 12 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
5.2.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the AC power is converted into DC power by the AC/DC power equipment and distributed to components in the cabinet. Figure 5-16 shows the power distribution scheme for the OMB or IMB03 in the 220 V AC single-phase and 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenarios. Table 5-26 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Figure 5-16 Power distribution scheme for the OMB or IMB03 in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-26 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses
OMB or IMB03
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire
l BBU&HEUA: 10 A l TM: 20 A l BAT: 20 A l RRU: 12 A l TM: 4 A
Power Distribution Scheme in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the external power is forwarded by the DCDU-03B to the BBU, RRUs, and other components in the cabinet. Figure 5-17 shows the power distribution scheme for the OMB or IMB03 in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Table 5-27 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Figure 5-17 Power Distribution Scheme for the OMB or IMB03 in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario
Table 5-27 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses
OMB or IMB03
-48V DC
l RRU0 to RRU5: 6 × 20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1 x 12 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 1 x 12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Power Distribution Scheme in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario When the DBS3900 is supplied with +24 V DC power, the DBS3900 is configured with the IMB03 and IFS06. The +24 V DC power is converted into -48 V DC power by the DC/DC power equipment in the IMB03 and forwarded to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B provides power supply for the BBU, RRUs, and other components in the base station. Figure 5-18 shows the power distribution scheme for the IMB03. Table 5-28 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03. Figure 5-18 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 in the +24 V DC power supply scenario
Table 5-28 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03 in the +24 V DC power supply scenario Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers
IMB03+IFS06
+24V DC
l RRU0 to RRU5: 6 × 20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1 x 12 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the TP48600A cabinet in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC power supply scenarios. When the TP48600A cabinet uses the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the AC power supply is transferred by the PDU05A-03 and converted into DC power by the ETP, and then the DC power is distributed to different devices by the DCDU-11C and DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B. After going through the PDU05A-03, an AC power input is converted into five AC power outputs: l
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
One AC power output is connected to the junction box on the right of the cabinet door, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the HAU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
l
Three AC power outputs are connected to the PSU and converted by the PSU into DC power outputs, which are then provided for the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B, and batteries.
l
One AC power output is provided for the SOU.
Figure 5-19 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V AC power is supplied and the DCDU-11B is used. Figure 5-20 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V AC power is supplied and the DCDU-03B is used. Table 5-29 lists the specifications of circuit breakers. The power distribution scheme for the cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power is the same as the power distribution scheme for the cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase input power. The difference between the power distribution schemes for the three types of power inputs resides in the configuration of short-circuiting bars, as shown in Figure 5-21. Figure 5-19 Power distribution scheme for the 220 V AC three-phase input power (DCDU-11B)
Figure 5-20 Power distribution scheme for the 220 V AC three-phase input power (DCDU-03B)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System
Table 5-29 Specification of the circuit breakers Power Distribution Device
Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers
PDU05A-03
l PSU 1/5: 1 x 40 A
-
l PSU 2/6: 1 x 40 A l PSU 3/4/7: 1 x 63 A l HEATER: 1 x 25 A l SOU: 1 x 10 A ETP
-
l DCDU-11C: LOAD0 (1 x 100 A) l DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B: LOAD3 (1 x 200 A) and LOAD5 (1 x 200 A) l TMC11H (Ver.C): LOAD1 and LOAD2 (1 x 100 A) l Batteries: LOAD6 (1 x 400 A) l SPARE: LOAD4 (1 x 200 A)
DCDU-11C
-
l CCU: LOAD0 (1 x 6 A) l CMUF: LOAD1 (1 x 6 A) l TM(1): LOAD2 (1 x 12 A) l EMUA/TM: LOAD3 (1 x 12 A) l BBU: LOAD4 to LOAD7 (4 x 25 A) l CMUF: LOAD8 (1 x 25 A) l IBBS: LOAD9 (1 x 25 A)
DCDU-11B
-
l RRU: LOAD0 to LOAD5 (6 x 25 A) l SPARE: LOAD6 to LOAD9 (4 x 25 A)
DCDU-03B
-
l RRU: LOAD0 to LOAD5 (6 x 20 A) l SPARE: LOAD6 to LOAD8 (3 x 12 A)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
DBS3900 Hardware Description
5 DBS3900 Power System NOTE
(1) TM: transmission device
Figure 5-21 Configuration of short-circuiting bars
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
6
DBS3900 Monitoring System
About This Chapter The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900. 6.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet The APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet. 6.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet The APM30 (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus. 6.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 The OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The monitoring boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the BBU. 6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet The TP48600A cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU. The boards collect alarms from sensors and fans, and transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet. 6.5 Customized Alarm Input When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
6.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/ APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet The APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.
Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario NOTE
The DBS3900 can be configured with the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.
Figure 6-1 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC or with additional 1 APM30+1 BBC when the BBU is installed in the APM30. The devices monitored by the APMI and AFMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU.
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30.
Figure 6-1 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30 APM30
APM30
APMI
APMI
COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 ALM0/ALM1 MON0 / MON1
AFMU
PMU
APM30 APMI AFMU
PMU
AFMU
PMU
TX RX RS232/RS422
Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination TMC
Door Status Sensor
BBU
BBC Door Status Sensor
APMI
Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarm signal cable on the DCDU
BBU
TMC
BBC Door Status Sensor
APMI
AFMU Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarm signal cable on the DCDU
BBC Door Status Sensor
AFMU
Door Status Sensor
Figure 6-2 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/ IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A). The devices monitored by the HEUA and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Figure 6-2 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A) BAT
APM30H(Ver.A)
APM30H(Ver.A)
APM30H(Ver.A)
COM COM_OUT / COM2
PMU
HPMI
HPMI
HPMI
COM_IN / COM1
PMU
HEUA
HEUA
PMU
HEUA
MON0 / MON1 TO PMU DB50 RS232/RS422 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination TMC11H(Ver.A) HEUA
BBU
BBU
BBC/IBBS
Door status sensor
TMC11H(Ver.A) HEUA
BBC/IBBS
Door status sensor
BBC/IBBS
Door status sensor
Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario Figure 6-3 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with two TMCs or TMC11Hs(Ver.A) when the BBU is installed in a TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A). l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
Figure 6-3 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) TMC/TMC11H
TMC/TMC11H
COM_IN / COM1 MON0 / MON1
Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination
APMI/HEUA/CMUA
APMI/HEUA/CMUA
BBU
6.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet The APM30 (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.
Cabinet Monitoring Principles of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). When the base station is configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), the BBU is installed in the main APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C), which is located to the left of another APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). The CUMUA is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), and the CMUE is installed in the APM30H (Ver.C). The APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) use the same monitoring scheme. The Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
devices monitored by the CMUA, CMUE, and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l
For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.
l
For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUE, see CMUE.
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see Power Subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 6-4 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). Figure 6-4 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/ APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
HPMI
HPMI
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 COM_485
PMU
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
MON0 / MON1
HPMI
CMUA/CMUE
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
TO PMU DB50 COM
Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination
BBU
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) CMUA/CMUE
BBU
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
Figure 6-5 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). Figure 6-5 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/ APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) HPMI
CMUA/CMUE PMU
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
HPMI
COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
HPMI
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
COM_485 MON0 / MON1 TO PMU DB50 COM
BBU
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination
BBU
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
208
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Figure 6-6 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in the outdoor scenario. Figure 6-6 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 6-7 illustrates the monitoring scheme when two the BBU is configured in one of the two TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) configured for the DBS3900. Figure 6-7 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B)
Figure 6-8 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 6-8 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 DC power supply scenario COM_IN
APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)
ALM PRESENT
CMUA
MON0 / MON1 EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1
Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Power System (DC/DC)
BBU
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Monitoring Scheme for a Triple-Mode Base Station NOTE
BBU0 is the main or root BBU, and BBU1 is the extension or leaf BBU.
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU0 is installed in the main APM30H (Ver.B) or main APM30H (Ver.C) on the left. BBU1 is installed in the extension APM30H (Ver.B) or extension APM30H (Ver.C) on the right. In a triple-mode base station, all monitoring devices are connected to BBU0. The monitoring scheme for a triple-mode base station is the same as a single- or dual-mode base station, as shown in Figure 6-9, Figure 6-10, and Figure 6-11. Figure 6-9 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/ APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs
Figure 6-10 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/ APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBSs
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Figure 6-11 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBUs are installed in the TMC11Hs (Ver.B)/TMC11Hs (Ver.C)
6.3 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 The OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The monitoring boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the BBU.
Cabinet Monitoring Principles of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station NOTE
The devices monitored by the monitoring boards or modules are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards and modules. l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA. l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the lower IMB03. l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see Power Subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 6-12 shows the monitoring scheme when the BBU is installed in the OMB in the 110 V or 220 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 6-13 shows the monitoring scheme for the cabinet using the -48 V DC power supply. Figure 6-12 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the AC OMB
Figure 6-13 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the AC OMB
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Figure 6-14 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU +RRU+IMB03 using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. In this solution, the BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed remotely outside the IMB03. Figure 6-14 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03 (110 V/220 V) scenario IMB03 RS485 MON0 / MON1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery
BBU
PMU
Monitoring from source to destination
Figure 6-15 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU +RRU+ICR and also in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario. In this solution, the BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRU is installed on the IFS06. Figure 6-16 shows the monitoring scheme for the cabinet using the +24 V DC power supply. Figure 6-15 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110 V/220 V) scenario IMB03 COM_IN / COM1 MON0 / MON1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination
BBU
IMB03 PMU
Figure 6-16 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (+24 V DC) scenario IMB03
ALM PRESENT EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination
BBU
IMB03 Power System (DC/DC)
Monitoring Scheme for a Triple-Mode Base Station NOTE
l The DBS3900 configured with the OMB or the DBS3900 that uses the indoor solution of BBU+RRU +IMB03 does not support the triple-mode scenario. The solution of BBU+RRU+ICR supports the triple-mode scenario. l BBU0 is the main or root BBU, and BBU1 is the extension or leaf BBU.
When the indoor solution of BBU+RRU+ICR is used in the triple-mode scenario, two BBUs need to be configured: BBU0 and BBU1. BBU0 is installed in No.1 IMB03. It monitors No.0 IMB03 and No.1 IMB03. BBU1 is installed in No.3 IMB03. It monitors No.2 IMB03 and No. 3 IMB03. For details, see Figure 6-17 and Figure 6-18.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Figure 6-17 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110 V/220 V) scenario
Figure 6-18 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (-48 V DC) scenario
6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet The TP48600A cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU. The boards collect alarms from sensors and fans, and transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.
Cabinet Monitoring Schemes of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station A single-mode or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the TP48600A cabinet. Figure 6-19 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 6-20 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T. NOTE
The devices monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. For monitoring of the EMUA, see 6.5 Customized Alarm Input. l For the functions of the ports on the CMUF, see CMUF. l For the functions of the ports on the PMU, see PMU. l For the functions of the ports on the CCU, see CCU. l For the positions of the CCU, CMUF, and PMU in different cabinets, see 4.2 DBS3900 Cabinets. l When a BBU is configured with a UPEU and a UEIU or two UPEUs, the CCU can only be connected to the MON0 port on one of the boards, the MON0 port on the other board must not be used, and the MON1 ports cannot be connected to the CCU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Figure 6-19 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Figure 6-20 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
NOTE
If a device is not configured at a site, the monitoring signal cable is directly connected to the lower-level device. For example, if the HAU0 and HAU1 shown in Figure 6-19 are not configured, the monitoring signal cable can directly connect the RS485 port on the EMUA to the CCU.
Monitoring Scheme for a Triple-Mode Base Station Two BBUs are configured in a triple-mode base station, and the two BBUs are installed in the TP48600A cabinet. Figure 6-21 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 6-22 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T. NOTE
In this document, BBU0 and BBU1 are used to exemplify two triple-mode BBUs. l In a base station to be expanded, BBU0 is installed during initial site construction, and BBU1 is installed during capacity expansion. l In a new base station, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 works in LTEonly or UMTS-only mode.
Figure 6-21 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Figure 6-22 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
6.5 Customized Alarm Input When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU. Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods: l
The alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU.
l
The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see the related initial configuration guide.
Monitoring Board Configuration If a BBU monitors customer devices, customized alarms about the devices must be reported to the BBU. According to the number of required customized alarm inputs, the DBS3900 needs to be configured with different types of monitoring boards, as listed in Table 6-1. Table 6-1 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900 External Power Input
Application Scenario
Number of Boolean Signals to Be Monitored
Monitoring Board Configuration
-48 V DC/220 V AC
Indoor DBS3900
N/A
UPEU
1 to 16
UPEU+UEIU
17 to 32
UPEU+UEIU +EMUA
N/A
UPEU
1 to 16
UPEU+UEIU +(2xUSLP2+SLPU)
17 to 32
UPEU+UEIU +EMUA
Outdoor DBS3900
NOTE
l If backup power is required for the BBU, two UPEUs are configured instead of UPEU+UEIU. l The analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA. l Two USLP2s and one SLPU are delivered in a package. l The EMUA with sensors is configured according to site requirements for the indoor DBS3900.
Using the UPEU or UEIU to collect customized alarms Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of two UPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured in the BBU to receive 16 Boolean alarm inputs. This method can be used for the configuration of less than 16 customized alarm inputs. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
When using this method, connect the device to be monitored to the SLPU for surge protection, and then connect the SLPU to the EXT_ALM port on the BBU, as shown in Figure 6-23. Figure 6-23 Using the UPEU or UEIU to collect customized alarms
Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPU and then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU or EUIU through the alarm cable for the BBU. Table 6-2 describes the relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports and the number of customized alarms. Table 6-2 Relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 and the number of customized alarms Pins of the IN0 to IN3 ports
USLP2 in the upper slot IN0
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN0
IN1
IN2
IN3
1
4+
5+
0+
1+
12+
13+
8+
9+
2
4(GND)
5(GND)
0(GND)
1(GND)
12(GND)
13(GND)
8(GND)
9(GND)
3
6(GND)
7+
2(GND)
3+
14(GND)
15+
10(GND)
11+
4
6+
7(GND)
2+
3(GND)
14+
15(GND)
10+
11(GND)
USLP2 in the lower slot
For details about ports on the USLP2, see 3.3.5 USLP2. For details about the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable, see 7.2.18 BBU Alarm Cable. NOTE
The SLPU is configured with two USLP2s by default before delivery when it is used as an alarm signal protection unit. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot. In this case, the USLP2 in slot 2 of the SLPU is not used.
Using the EMUA to collect customized alarms The EMUA can be configured for the DBS3900 that requires more than 16 Boolean alarm signals. Each EMUA supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMU reports the alarms to the CMUA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-24. Figure 6-24 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (1)
RS-485 SENSOR
Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMU reports the alarms to the CMUA, which transfers the alarms to the RRU through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-25. Figure 6-25 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (2)
RRU ALM
COM_OUT
COM_IN
COM_IN
COM_OUT
CMUA
PMU EMUA RS-485 SENSOR
When the DBS3900 uses the TP48600A cabinet, customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the CCU. Then, the CCU transfers the alarms to the BBU through an MON port. Figure 6-26 shows the cable connections.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
DBS3900 Hardware Description
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Figure 6-26 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (3)
For details about the position of the input ports on the EMUA and cable connections between the EMUA and the sensors, see EMUA User Guide.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
7
DBS3900 Cables
About This Chapter This chapter describes the cable connections in the DBS3900 and BBU3900 cables in various scenarios. NOTE
l For the cables in DBS3900 cabinets, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.B) Product Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product Description, TP48600A-H17B1 User Manual, and IBBS700D & IBBS700T User Manual. l For the RRU cables, see the installation guide for the corresponding type of RRU.
7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900 The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables, as well as the interconnection signal cables, for the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900. 7.2 BBU3900 Cables This section describes the exteriors, pin assignment for the wires, and connections of BBU3900 cables.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900 The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables, as well as the interconnection signal cables, for the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900.
7.1.1 Power Cable Connections This section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the power distribution unit (PDU), which converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power to provides power to customer equipment. APM30 is short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler. NOTE
The DBS3900 uses the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.
Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario When the input power is 110 V/220 V AC power, a distributed base station uses one APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one battery backup cabinet (BBC). The APM30 is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU, and TMC. Figure 7-1 describes power cable connections. Figure 7-1 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30, one TMC, and one BBC
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-1 lists the power cables. Table 7-1 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC +1 BBC Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cable of the Power Cabinet
P2 and P5
Power cables for the fan box
P3
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable
P4
Input Power Cable of the APM30 Transmission Cabinet
P6
Power Cable for the Batteries
P7
Input Power Cable of the Heater
P8
Input Power Cable of the Heating Film
P9
RRU power cable
When a base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC, the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU, and TMC11H (Ver.A). Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connections. Figure 7-2 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-2 lists the power cables. Table 7-2 Power cables for a base station in the configuration of one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cable of the APM30H Power Cabinet
P2 and P5
Power cables for the fan box
P3
BBU Power Cable
P4
Input Power Cable of the TMC11H
P6
Power Cable for the Batteries
P7
Input Power Cable for the Heater in the Battery Cabinet
P8
Input Power Cable for the Heating Film in the Battery Cabinet
P9
RRU power cable
When a base station uses one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T, the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver.A). Figure 7-3 shows the power cable connections.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-3 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T
Table 7-3 lists the power cables. Table 7-3 Power cables for a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+one TMC11H (Ver.A)+one IBBS200T Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P2 and P5
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3
BBU Power Cable
P4
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P6 and P7
Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
P8
RRU power cable
Power Cable Connections in the -48 V AC Power Supply Scenario When the input power is -48 V DC, a distributed base station uses two TMCs. The TMCs are configured with direct current distribution unit-03Bs (DCDU-03Bs), which provide power to the BBU and RRU or transmission equipment. Figure 7-4 describes power cable connections.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-4 Power cable connections of a base station using two TMCs
Table 7-4 lists the power cables. Table 7-4 Power cables of a base station using two TMCs Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cable of the APM30 Transmission Cabinet
P2
Power cables for the fan box
P3
BBU Power Cable
P4
RRU power cable
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.A) provide power to the BBU, RRU, or transmission equipment. Figure 7-5 shows the power cable connections. Figure 7-5 Power cable connections of a base station using two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Table 7-5 lists the power cables.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-5 Power cables of a base station using two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cable of the APM30 Transmission Cabinet
P2
Power cables for the fan box
P3
BBU Power Cable
P4
RRU power cable
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei provides a series of power equipment, which is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). The power equipment converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to customer equipment.
Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario When a single- or dual-mode base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with an EPS, which converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for the BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.B). Figure 7-6 shows the power cable connections. Figure 7-6 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-6 lists the power cables. Table 7-6 Power cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
Power cable for the junction box
P2 and P11
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3
BBU power cable
P4
Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
P5
Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P6
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P7
RRU power cable
P8
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P9
Power Cable for the Heating Film in the IBBS200D
When a single- or dual-mode base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver.C) is configured with an EPU, which converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for the BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 7-7 describes power cable connections.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-7 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D
Table 7-7 lists the power cables. Table 7-7 Power cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the APM30H
P2
Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3
Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P4
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P5
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P6
RRU power cable
P7
BBU Power Cable
P8
Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
P9
Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D
P10
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P11
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the TMC11H
Figure 7-8 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T. Figure 7-8 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T
Table 7-8 lists the power cables. Table 7-8 Power cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P9
Power cable for the junction box
P2 and P10
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3
BBU power cable
P4
Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
P5
Power Cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T
P6
Input Power Cables for the APM30H Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P7
RRU power cable
P8
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
Figure 7-9 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T. Figure 7-9 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T
Table 7-9 lists the power cables. Table 7-9 Power cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the APM30H
P2
Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3
Power Cables for Storage Batteries
P4
Input Power Cables for the APM30H Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P5
RRU power cable
P6
BBU Power Cable
P7
Power Cables for Storage Batteries
P8
Power Cables for the TEC
P9
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P10
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the TMC11H
Figure 7-10 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D. Figure 7-10 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200D
Table 7-10 lists the power cables.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-10 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200D Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
Power cable for the junction box
P2 and P12
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3
BBU power cable
P5 and P13
Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P7
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P8
RRU power cable
P9
Power cable for the heating film
P11
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P4 and P14
Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
Figure 7-11 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds. Figure 7-11 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds
Table 7-11 lists the power cables. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-11 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the APM30H
P2 and P4
Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3
Power Cable for the Heating Film
P5
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P6
RRU power cable
P7
BBU Power Cable
P9 and P13
Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D
P10
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P11
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the TMC11H
P8 and P12
Power Cables for Storage Batteries
Figure 7-12 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+2 TMC11Hs (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200Ts. Figure 7-12 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-12 lists the power cables. Table 7-12 Power cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P9
Power cable for the junction box
P2 and P11
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3
BBU Power Cable
P5 and P12
Power Cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T
P7
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P8
RRU power cable
P10
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P4 and P13
Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
Figure 7-13 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts. Figure 7-13 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-13 lists the power cables. Table 7-13 Power cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the APM30H
P2 and P3
Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P4
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P5
RRU power cable
P6
BBU Power Cable
P8 and P11
Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D
P9
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P10
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the TMC11H
P7 and P12
Power Cables for Storage Batteries
If the DBS3900 serves as a triple-mode base station, it needs to be configured with two BBUs: BBU0 and BBU1. The power cable connections in the cabinet housing BBU0 are the same as those in the cabinet housing BBU1. Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15 show the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) as an example.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-14 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds
Table 7-14 lists the power cables. Table 7-14 Power cables in a triple-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
Power cable for the junction box
P2 and P11
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3
BBU Power Cable
P4
Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
P5
Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P6
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P7
RRU power cable
P8
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P9
Power cable for the heating film
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-15 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds P2
P2
P12 P11
P1
P1 P9
P9 P10
P7
P9
BBU0
P3
P7
P10
BBU1
P6
P3 P6
P4
P4 P5
P5
P13 P14
P13 P14
P8
P8
Table 7-15 lists the power cables. Table 7-15 Power cables in a triple-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
Power cable for the junction box
P2, P6, and P12
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3
BBU Power Cable
P5 and P13
Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P7
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P8
RRU power cable
P9
Power cable for the heating film
P11
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P4 and P14
Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
Power Cable Connections in the -48 V AC Power Supply Scenario When two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) are configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.B) provide power to the BBU, RRUs, or transmission equipment. Figure 7-16 describes power cable connections.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-16 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dualmode base station
Table 7-16 lists the power cables. Table 7-16 Power cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P2
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
P3
BBU Power Cable
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) are configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.C) provide power to the BBU, RRUs, or transmission equipment. Figure 7-17 describes power cable connections. Figure 7-17 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dualmode base station
Table 7-17 lists the power cables. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-17 Power cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P2
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the TMC11H
P3
BBU Power Cable
Power Cable Connections in the +24V DC Power Supply Scenario If a single- or dual-mode base station uses an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V), the DC/DC power equipment in the APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) converts the +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power and forwards the power to the DCDU-03B, which then distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components in the cabinet. Figure 7-18 describes power cable connections. Figure 7-18 Power cable connections in an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) configured for a singleor dual-mode base station
Table 7-18 lists the power cables. Table 7-18 Power cables in an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input power cable for the DC/DC power equipment
P2
Input power cables for the DCDU-03B
P3
BBU Power Cable
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 To support various power supplies, the OMB or IMB03 can be configured with AC/DC or DC/ DC power equipment to convert the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power, which is supplied to the components in the OMB or IMB03. NOTE
l The power cable connections for the IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 that is configured for the DBS3900 in various power supply scenarios are described in the DBS3900 (Ver.B) Installation Guide and DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide. IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor installation support. l In the single-mode or dual-mode scenario, the DBS3900 uses the outdoor mini box (OMB) or IMB03. The DBS3900 uses the IMB03+IFS06 in the single-mode, dual-mode scenario, or triple-mode scenario.
Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario Figure 7-19 shows the power cable connections for the AC OMB configured for the DBS3900. Figure 7-19 Power cable connections for the AC OMB
Table 7-19 lists the power cables. Table 7-19 Power cables for the AC OMB
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Power Cable for the Inner Air Circulation Fan
P2
HEUA Power Cable
P3
BBU Power Cable
P4
Input power cable for the DCDU Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P5
Power Cable for the Outer Air Circulation Fan
P6
Input power cable for the AC/DC power equipment
P7
AC input power cable for the OMB
P8
RRU power cable
Power Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario Figure 7-20 shows the power cable connections for the DC OMB configured for the DBS3900. Figure 7-20 Power cable connections for the DC OMB
Table 7-20 lists the power cables. Table 7-20 Power cables for the DC OMB
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Power Cable for the Inner Air Circulation Fan
P2
HEUA Power Cable
P3
Power Cable for the Outer Air Circulation Fan
P4
BBU Power Cable Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P5
DC input power cable for the OMB
P6
RRU power cable
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet The TP48600A cabinet can be configured with the PDU05A-3 and ETP to use the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. The PDU05A-3 distributes AC power and the ETP distributes DC power to devices in the cabinet. Figure 7-21 shows the power cable connections in this scenario: The DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H (Ver.C), and two BBUs are installed in the TP48600A cabinet that uses the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. The power cable connections for one IBBS700T and for one IBBS700D are the same. This section describes only the power cable connections for one IBBS700D. NOTE
If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A cabinet, two BBU power cables are required.
Figure 7-21 Power cable connections of the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Table 7-21 describes power cable connections. Table 7-21 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
External AC input power cable Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P2 to P5
BBU Power Cable
P6
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P7
Power cable for the batteries
P8 to P19
RRU power cables
7.1.2 Transmission Cable Connections This section describes the transmission cable connections in the indoor and outdoor DBS3900 base stations in different modes.
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Single-Mode Base Station In GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or optical cable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Configuration Principles l
In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.
l
The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.
l
The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.
l
The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected to the SLPU.
Application Scenario Table 7-22 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in different modes. Table 7-22 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
Trans missio n over the E1 Cable
GSM only
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU.
"1" in the Figure 7-22 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and UTRP.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS only
Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.
"2" in the Figure 7-22 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT.
Trans missio n over the FE Cable
LTE only
The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.
"3" in Figure 7-22 shows the cable connections.
GSM only
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc.
"4" in the Figure 7-22 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU. UMTS only
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the UTRP2.
"5" in the Figure 7-22 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the UTRP9. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT. LTE only
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
"6" in the Figure 7-22 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Figure 7-22 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-22 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Single-Mode Base Station In GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or optical cable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Configuration principles l
In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.
Application Scenario Table 7-23 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in different transmission modes. Table 7-23 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
Trans missio n over the E1 Cable
GSM Only
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU.
"1" in the Figure 7-23 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and UTRP. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS Only
Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.
"2" in the Figure 7-23 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT.
Trans missio n over the FE Cable
LTE Only
The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.
"3" in the Figure 7-23 shows the cable connections.
GSM Only
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc.
"4" in the Figure 7-23 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU. UMTS Only
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the UTRP2.
"5" in the Figure 7-23 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the UTRP9. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT. LTE Only
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
"6" in the Figure 7-23 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Figure 7-23 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-23 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
T2: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
-
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in CoTransmission Mode In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Configuration Principles l
In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.
l
In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.
l
In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
l
In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
l
The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.
l
The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.
l
The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected to the SLPU.
Application Scenario Table 7-24 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different transmission modes. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-24 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common transmission mode
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
TDM Comm on Trans missio n
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU. Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.
"1" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
IP Over E1/T1 Comm on Trans missio n
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port or optical port.
"2" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port or optical port. GSM +LTE
The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port or optical port.
"3" in Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections.
UMTS +LTE
The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port or optical port.
"4" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
IP over GSM FE/GE +UMT Comm S on Trans missio n
Application Scenario
Legend
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc.
"5" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected to the UTRP using the optical port. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 5: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the backplane.
GSM +LTE
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
"6" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the backplane.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc.
"7" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT through the backplane. Route Backu p Mode with IP Comm on Trans missio n
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
GSM +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
"8" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
"9" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
250
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port.
"10" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port. Hybrid Trans missio n
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port.
"11" in the Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port.
Figure 7-24 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-24 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common transmission mode
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable
T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
T3: 7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports
T4: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
T5: 7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports
T6: 7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable
T7: 7.2.6 FE/GE Cable
-
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in CoTransmission Mode In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Configuration Principles l
In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.
l
In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.
l
In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
l
In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
Application Scenario Table 7-25 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different transmission modes. Table 7-25 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common transmission mode
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
TDM Comm on Trans missio n
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU. Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.
"1" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
IP Over E1/T1 Comm on Trans missio n
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port or optical port.
"2" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port or optical port. GSM +LTE
The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port or optical port.
"3" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections.
UMTS +LTE
The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port or optical port.
"4" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
IP over GSM FE/GE +UMT Comm S on Trans missio n
Application Scenario
Legend
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc.
"5" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected to the UTRP using the optical port. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 5: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the backplane.
GSM +LTE
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
"6" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the backplane.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc.
"7" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT through the backplane. Route Backu p Mode with IP Comm on Trans missio n
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
GSM +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
"8" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
"9" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 3: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the backplane.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port.
"10" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port. Hybrid Trans missio n
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port.
"11" in the Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port.
Figure 7-25 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-25 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common transmission mode
T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
T2: 7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports
T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
T4: 7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports
T5: 7.2.6 FE/GE Cable
-
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Configuration Principles l
The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.
l
The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.
l
The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected to the SLPU.
Application Scenario Table 7-26 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different transmission modes. Table 7-26 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent transmission mode Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
GSM E1/T1 +UMT S E1/ T1
GSM +UMT S
The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.
"1" in the Figure 7-26 shows the cable connections.
GSM FE/GE +UMT S FE/ GE
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.
"2" in the Figure 7-26 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
GSM E1/T1 +LTE FE/GE
GSM +LTE
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
UMTS FE/GE +LTE FE/GE
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
GSM +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE electrical port on the GTMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
"3" in the Figure 7-26 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
"4" in the Figure 7-26 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
258
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS E1/T1 +LTE FE/GE
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
"5" in the Figure 7-26 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTS side. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. UMTS FE/GE +LTE FE/GE
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the WMPT or UMPT. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
"6" in the Figure 7-26 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Figure 7-26 shows the cable connections supported by each mode. Figure 7-26 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent transmission mode
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber T4: 7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable Optic Cable Protection Transfer Cable T5: 7.2.6 FE/GE Cable
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
-
259
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Application Scenario Table 7-27 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different transmission modes. Table 7-27 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common transmission mode Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
GSM E1/T1 +UMT S E1/ T1
GU
The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.
"1" in the Figure 7-27 shows the cable connections.
GSM FE/GE +UMT S FE/ GE
GU
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.
"2" in the Figure 7-27 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
GSM E1/T1 +LTE FE/GE
GL
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
UMTS FE/GE +LTE FE/GE
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
GL
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE electrical port on the GTMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
"3" in the Figure 7-27 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
"4" in the Figure 7-27 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
260
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS E1/T1 +LTE FE/GE
UL
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
"5" in the Figure 7-27 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTS side. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. UMTS FE/GE +LTE FE/GE
UL
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the WMPT or UMPT. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
"6" in the Figure 7-27 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
Figure 7-27 shows the cable connections supported by each mode. Figure 7-27 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common transmission mode
T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
T5: 7.2.6 FE/GE Cable
-
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Triple-Mode Base Station This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station. In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding. l
In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction, and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
l
In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
l
The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL +UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
Table 7-28 lists the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station. Table 7-28 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Triple Mode
Mode Specification
Reference
GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1) (BBUs not cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM +UMTS mode and BBU1 works in LTE only mode.
GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1) (BBUs not cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode and BBU1 works in UMTS only mode.
UO (BBU0) + GL (BBU1) (BBUs not cascaded)
BBU0 works in UMTS only mode and BBU1 works in GSM+LTE mode.
GO (BBU0) + UL (BBU1) (BBUs not cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM only mode and BBU1 works in UMTS+LTE mode.
l In dual mode, common and independent transmission are supported. For details, see the Transmission Cable Connections for a DualMode Base Station in Common Transmission Mode and the Transmission Cable Connections for a DualMode Base Station in Independent Transmission Mode. l For details about the transmission cable connections for a singlemode base station, see the Transmission Cable Connections for a SingleMode Base Station.
GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1) (BBUs cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM +UMTS mode and BBU1 works in LTE only mode.
For details, see the "1" or the "2" in the Figure 7-28.
GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1) (BBUs cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode and BBU1 works in UMTS only mode.
For details, see the "3" or the "4" in the Figure 7-28.
GU (BBU0) + UL (BBU1) (BBUs cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM +UMTS mode and BBU1 works in UMTS+LTE mode.
For details, see the "5" in the Figure 7-28.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-28 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station. Figure 7-28 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
T1: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Triple-Mode Base Station This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station. In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding. l
In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction, and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
l
In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
l
The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL +UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
Application Scenario Table 7-29 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-29 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station Triple-Mode Scenario
Mode Specification
Reference
GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1) (BBU Not Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM +UMTS mode and BBU 1 works in LTE only mode.
GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1) (BBU Not Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE mode and BBU 1 works in UMTS only mode.
UO (BBU 0)+GL (BBU 1) (BBU Not Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in UMTS only mode and BBU 1 works in GSM+LTE mode.
GO (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1) (BBU Not Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM only mode and BBU 1 works in UMTS+LTE mode.
l Dual-mode includes common and noncommon transmission. For details, see the Transmission Cable Connections for a DualMode Base Station in Common Transmission Mode and the Transmission Cable Connections for a DualMode Base Station in Non-Common Transmission Mode. l For details about the transmission cable connections for a singlemode base station, see the Transmission Cable Connections for a SingleMode Base Station.
GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1) (BBU Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM +UMTS mode and BBU 1 works in LTE only mode.
For details, see the "1" or "2" in the Figure 7-29
GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1) (BBU Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE mode and BBU 1 works in UMTS only mode.
For details, see the "3" or "4" in the Figure 7-29
GU (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1) (BBU Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM +UMTS mode and BBU 1 works in UMTS+LTE mode.
For details, see the "2" in the Figure 7-29
Figure 7-29 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-29 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
T1:7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
7.1.3 CPRI Cable Connections CPRI cable connections for the DBS3900 depend on the mode of the DBS3900.
CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM Only Base Station When the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. Figure 7-30 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3008s/ RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, six RRUs support three sectors, and a pair of two RRUs working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-30 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-31 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3008s/ RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, nine RRUs support three sectors, and a group of three RRUs working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded. Figure 7-31 CPRI cable connections (2)
CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS Only Base Station When the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. Figure 7-33 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is configured with the WBBPb, the RRU3804s work in single-band mode and support MIMO, and the base station supports a maximum of three sectors.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-33 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-34 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is configured with the WBBPb, the RRU3804s work in single-band mode and supports MIMO or supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports a maximum of three sectors, and two RRU3804s work in the same sector are cascaded. Figure 7-34 CPRI cable connections (2)
Figure 7-35 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is configured with the WBBPd, the RRU3804s work in single-band mode and supports MIMO or supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports a maximum of three sectors, and two RRU3804s work in the same sector are cascaded.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-35 CPRI cable connections (3)
CPRI Cable Connections in the LO Base Station When the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band. NOTE
CPRI cables are connected to CPRI ports on the LBBP one by one starting from the CPRI0 port.
Figure 7-36 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is configured with the LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPc, the RRUs work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO, and the base station supports a maximum of three sectors. Figure 7-36 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-37 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is configured with the LBBPd2 or LBBPc, the RRUs work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, and support 4T4R MIMO, each pair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station supports a maximum of three sectors. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-37 CPRI cable connections (2)
Figure 7-38 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is configured with the LBBPc, the RRUs work in single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 4T4R MIMO, and each pair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station supports a maximum of three sectors. Figure 7-38 CPRI cable connections (3)
CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station When the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. Figure 7-39 shows the CPRI cable connections when the RRU3908 works in single-band mode and three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology support three sectors.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-39 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-40 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3804s work in single-band mode, the RRU3804s working in star topology and each supports a sector; the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded. Figure 7-40 CPRI cable connections (2)
Figure 7-41 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3804s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3804s working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded; the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dualband mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-41 CPRI cable connections (3)
Figure 7-42 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors; the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in single-band mode, and three RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star topology correspond to three sectors. Figure 7-42 CPRI cable connections (4)
CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station When the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band. Figure 7-43 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s work in single-band mode and support 2T2R MIMO, three RRU3201s serve three sectors and use the Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s serving the same sector with different bands are connected in the star and chain topology. Figure 7-43 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-44 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s work in dual-band mode, use 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO, all the RRU3201s serve three sectors and use the star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s serving the same sector with different bands are connected in the star and chain topology. Figure 7-44 CPRI cable connections (2)
Figure 7-45 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s work in single-band mode, all the RRU3201s serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 4T4R MIMO, and the RRU3201s serving the same sector are connected in the dual-star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, and two RRU3008s serving the same sector with different bands are connected in the star and chain topology. Figure 7-45 CPRI cable connections (3)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-46 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and the RRU3908s serving the same sector are connected in the dual-star topology; the RRU3008s work in single-band mode, three RRU3008s serve three sectors and use the star topology. Figure 7-46 CPRI cable connections (4)
CPRI Cable Connections in the UL Base Station When the DBS3900 works in UL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band. Figure 7-47 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201 works in single-band mode, all the RRU3201s serve three sectors, use the star topology, and support 2T2R MIMO; the RRU3804s work in single-band mode and do not support MIMO, all the RRU3804s serve three sectors and use the star topology. Figure 7-47 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-48 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s work in dual-band mode, all the RRU3201s serve three sectors, use 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
support 2T2R MIMO, and use the star CPRI topology; the RRU3804s work in single-band mode, two RRU3804s serving the same sector are connected in the star and chain topology. Figure 7-48 CPRI cable connections (2)
Figure 7-49 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s work in single-band mode, and all RRU3201s serves three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 4T4R MIMO, and the RRU3201s serving the same sector are connected in the dual-star topology; the RRU3804s work in single-band mode, all the RRU3804s serve three sectors, and the RRU3804s serving the same sector are connected in the star and chain topology. Figure 7-49 CPRI cable connections (3)
Figure 7-50 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRUs use the CPRI MUX networking mode, the UMTS mode is configured with the WBBPf, the LTE mode is configured with the LBBPd, the RRU3929s are used as multi-mode RRUs, and all CPRI cables are connected to the WBBPf.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-50 CPRI cable connections in CPRI MUX mode
CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station Starting from SingleRAN7.0, Huawei triple-mode base stations support six typical scenarios: GU+L (BBUs not interconnected), GL+U (BBUs not interconnected), U+GL (BBUs not interconnected), GU+L (BBUs interconnected), GL+U (BBUs interconnected), and GU+UL (BBUs interconnected). A single BBU can support a maximum of two modes. Therefore, two BBUs are required for a triple-mode base station. In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding. l
In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction, and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
l
In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
l
The difference between the GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and U+GL (BBUs not interconnected) scenario is as follows: The GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario applies to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the U+GL (BBUs not interconnected) scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
l
The difference between the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and GU+L (BBUs interconnected) scenario is as follows: In the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, a BBU in GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are in the same base station but not interconnected. In the GU+L (BBUs interconnected) scenario, a BBU in GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are in the same base station are interconnected through the UCIUs.
GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected) In the GU+L scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. In the GU+L scenario, BBU1 works in LTE only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the LO Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected) In the GL+U scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
In the GL+U scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
U+GL (BBUs not Interconnected) In the U+GL scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. In the U+GL scenario, BBU1 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
GU+UL (BBUs Interconnected) In the GU+UL scenario, BBU0 and BBU1 are interconnected by UCIU and UMPT to support the GUL triple-mode. Figure 7-51 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. Figure 7-51 CPRI cable connections in the GU+UL scenario
7.1.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario NOTE
The DBS3900 is configured with the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-52 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 in the configuration of one APM30H+one TMC+one BBC in the 110 V/220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 7-52 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of one APM30+one TMC+one BBC
Table 7-30 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-30 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of one APM30+one TMC+one BBC
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2
Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
S4 and S5
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
S6
Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the Batteries
S7
Monitoring Signal Cable for the APM30 Transmission Cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-53 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of one APM30H (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+one BBC. Figure 7-53 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of one APM30H (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+one BBC
Table 7-31 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-31 Monitoring signal cables for a base station in the configuration of one APM30H (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+one BBC Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2
Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 and S7
7.2.13 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
S4
Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the Batteries
S5 and S6
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
Figure 7-54 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of one APM30H (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+one IBBS200T. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-54 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of one APM30H (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+one IBBS200T
Table 7-32 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 7-32 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of one APM30H (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+one IBBS200T Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2
Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 and S7
7.2.13 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
S4
IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable
S5 and S6
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
Figure 7-55 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+two BBCs.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-55 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+two BBCs
Table 7-33 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-33 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+two BBCs Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2
Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 and S7
7.2.13 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
S4
Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the Batteries
S5 and S6
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
Figure 7-56 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+two IBBS200Ts.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-56 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+two IBBS200Ts
Table 7-34 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-34 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. A)+one TMC11H (Ver. A)+two IBBS200Ts Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2
Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 and S7
7.2.13 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
S4
IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable
S5 and S6
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario Figure 7-57 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured with two TMCs in the -48 V DC power supply scenario.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-57 Monitoring signal cable connections for two TMCs
Table 7-35 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-35 Monitoring cable connections for two TMCs Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
Figure 7-58 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A). Figure 7-58 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A)
Table 7-36 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-36 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2
7.2.13 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario Figure 7-59 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 that serves as a single- or dual-mode base station and is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Figure 7-59 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Table 7-37 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-37 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4
Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
S3 and S5
7.2.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
Figure 7-60 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Figure 7-60 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Table 7-38 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-38 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4
Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5
Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE and the BBU
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-61 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of one APM30H (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. Figure 7-61 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Table 7-39 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-39 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4
Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5
7.2.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
S6
Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs
Figure 7-62 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-62 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Table 7-40 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-40 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4
Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5
Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE and the BBU
S6
Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs
Figure 7-63 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+four IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-63 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts S1
S2 S3
S1
S1
S2
S6
S1
S5
S6 S4
S6 S4
Table 7-41 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-41 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4
Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5
7.2.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
S6
Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs
Figure 7-64 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. Figure 7-64 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-42 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-42 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4
Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5
Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE and the BBU
S6
Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs
A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs: BBU0 and BBU1. BBU0 is configured in the basic cabinet, and BBU1 is configured in the extension cabinet. The monitoring devices in all cabinets are connected to BBU0. Figure 7-65 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) as an example. Figure 7-65 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Table 7-43 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-43 Monitoring signal cables in a triple-mode base station in the configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4
Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
S3 and S5
7.2.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
S6
Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario Figure 7-66 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 serves as a single- or dual-mode base station and the BBUs are installed in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B). Figure 7-66 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B)
Table 7-44 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-44 Monitoring signal cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dualmode base station Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2
7.2.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
Figure 7-67 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the BBUs of the DBS3900 are configured in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C).
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-67 Monitoring signal cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station
Table 7-45 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-45 Monitoring signal cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dualmode base station Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2
Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE and the BBU
Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, IMB03, or IFS06 The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V AC/220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios. NOTE
l The monitoring signal cable connections for the IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 that is configured for the DBS3900 are described in the DBS3900 (Ver.B) Installation Guide and DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide. IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor installation support. l In the single-mode or dual-mode scenario, the DBS3900 uses the outdoor mini box (OMB) or IMB03. The DBS3900 uses the IMB03+IFS06 in the single-mode, dual-mode scenario, or triple-mode scenario.
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario Figure 7-68 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 uses an AC OMB.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-68 Connections of the monitoring signal cables for the AC OMB S2
S2
S1 S4 S1 S2
S3
S3 S5
S5
S4
S2
Table 7-46 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-46 Monitoring signal cables for the AC OMB Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
S2
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan
S3
Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA
S4
Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC Surge Protection Box
S5
Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DC Power Equipment
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario Figure 7-69 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 uses a DC OMB.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-69 Connections of the DC OMB monitoring signal cables
Table 7-47 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 7-47 Monitoring signal cables for the DC OMB Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
S2
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan
S3
Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 uses the TP48600A cabinet. When the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H (Ver.C), two BBUs are installed in the TP48600A cabinet. Figure 7-70 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in this scenario. The monitoring signal cable connections in the scenario with one IBBS700T are the same as those for the scenario with one IBBS700D. This section describes only the monitoring signal cable connections for the scenario with one IBBS700D. NOTE
If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A cabinet, only one CCU-BBU signal cable is required.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-70 Monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Table 7-48 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 7-48 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C) Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2
Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCU and the BBU
S3
Monitoring Signal Cable for the TMC11H
S4
Inter-CCU Signal Cable
7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections Two BBUs in a triple-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the mode supporting capability, two BBUs in a single-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the service processing capability of a single mode. NOTE
When two BBUs in a base station are cascaded to achieve the GUL triple-mode, BBU0 is the root BBU, and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.
UCIU+UMPT In a triple-mode base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 to achieve the GUL triple-mode. In a UMTS only base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 to expand the UMTS service processing capacity. Any port from M0 to M4 on the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU1, as shown in Figure 7-71. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables NOTE
In UCIU+UMPT mode, the UMPT must be configured as the main control board of BBU1. Table 7-49 lists the BBU configurations in UCIU+UMPT mode.
Table 7-49 BBU configurations Scenario Description
BBU0
BBU1
Triple-Mode Scenario
GU
L
GL
U
GU
UL
U
U
Single-Mode Scenario
Figure 7-71 Signal cable connection between the UCIU and the UMPT
WBBPf+WBBPf In the UCIU+UMPT mode, the WBBPfs in the two BBUs can be connected to transmit baseband data. As shown in Figure 7-71, the HEI ports on the WBBPfs in BBU0 and BBU1 are connected. NOTE
In SRAN7.0, only the WBBPf in slot 2 or 3 of a BBU can be connected to the WBBPf in another BBU.
Figure 7-72 Signal cable connection between the WBBPfs
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
7.2 BBU3900 Cables This section describes the exteriors, pin assignment for the wires, and connections of BBU3900 cables.
7.2.1 List of BBU3900 Cables The BBU3900 cables consist of the PGND cables, BBU power cables, E1/T1 cables, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE surge protection transfer cables, interconnection cables between FE electrical ports and between FE optical ports, CPRI fiber optic cables, APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable, HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable, CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable, monitoring signal cables for the EMUA, monitoring signal cables for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), BBU alarm signal cable, GPS clock signal cable, BBU cascading signal cable, co-site signal cable, and maintenance adapter cable. Table 7-50 lists the BBU3900 cables. Table 7-50 Cable list Cable
One End Connector
Installation Position
Connector
Installation Position
7.2.2 PGND Cable
OT terminal (M4, 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
Ground terminal on the BBU
OT terminal (M8, 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
External ground bar
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable
3V3 connector
PWR port on the UPEU in the BBU
OT terminal (M4, 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)
LOAD6 wiring terminal on the DCDU
3V3 connector
PWR port on the UPEU in the BBU
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
EPS/LOAD1
DB26 male connector
E1/T1 port on the UELP in the SLPU, or E1/T1 port on the UMPT, GTMU, WMPT, or UTRP in the BBU
Made onsite according to requirements
External transmission equipment
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
The Other End
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installation Position
Connector
Installation Position
7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable
DB26 male connector
E1/T1 port on the UMPT, GTMU, WMPT, or UTRP in the BBU
DB25 connector
INSIDE port on the UELP in the SLPU
7.2.6 FE/GE Cable
RJ45 connector
FE0 port in the OUTSIDE part of the UFLP in the SLPU
RJ45 connector
External transmission equipment
RJ45 connector
FE0 port in the INSIDE part of the UFLP in the SLPU
FE0 port on the UMPT, GTMU or WMPT in the BBU FE/GE port on the UTRP in the BBU FE/GE port on the LMPT in the BBU 7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable
RJ45 connector
FE0 port on the UMPT, GTMU or WMPT in the BBU FE/GE port on the UTRP in the BBU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports
RJ45 connector
FE0 port on the WMPT in the BBU
RJ45 connector
FE0 port on the GTMU in the BBU
7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports
LC connector
FE1 port on the WMPT in the BBU
LC connector
FE1 port on the GTMU in the BBU
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
LC connector
FE1 port on the WMPT or GTMU in the BBU
FC, SC, or LC connector
External transmission equipment
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installation Position
Connector
Installation Position
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable
DLC connector
CPRI port on the GTMU or WBBP in the BBU
DLC connector
CPRI_W port on the RRU
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
RJ45 connector
MON1 port on the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU
Twisted pair
TX+, TX-, RX +, or RX- port on the APMI
7.2.13 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
RJ45 connector
MON port on the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU
RJ45 connector
COM_IN port on the HEUA
7.2.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
RJ45 connector
MON1 port on the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU
RJ45 connector
CMUA/ COM_IN
7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA
RJ45 connector
MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU
DB9 male connector
RS485 port on the EMUA
7.2.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
RJ45 connector
EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU
Cord end terminal
ALM wiring terminal on the PSU (DC/DC)
7.2.17 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
RJ45 connector
EXT_ALM1 port on the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU
RJ45 connector
PRESENT port on the PSU (DC/DC)
7.2.18 BBU Alarm Cable
RJ45 connector
EXT_ALM port on the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU
RJ45 connector
External alarm device
7.2.19 GPS Clock Signal Cable
SMA male connector
GPS port on the LMPT or USCU in the BBU
N-type female connector
GPS surge protector
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installation Position
Connector
Installation Position
7.2.20 Inter-BBU Signal Cable
DLC connector
M0 to M4 ports on the UCIU in the BBU
DLC connector
CI port on the UMPT in the BBU
7.2.21 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations
DB15 male connector
GCK port on the UCIU in the BBU
MD36 or DB15 male connector
DGLUb on the DCTB in the BTS3012
7.2.22 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance
USB connector
USB port on the UMPT in the BBU
Ethernet connector
Ethernet cable
7.2.2 PGND Cable A PGND cable ensures proper grounding of a BBU.
Exterior A PGND cable is green and yellow and has a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.²). Both ends of the cable are OT terminals. If the customer prepares the PGND cable, a copper-core cable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.2) is recommended. Figure 7-73 shows a PGND cable. Figure 7-73 PGND cable for the BBU
(1) OT terminal (M4, 6 mm2, or 0.0093 in.²)
(1) OT terminal (M8, 6 mm2, or 0.0093 in.²)
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable The BBU power cable feeds power into the BBU. According to the input power supply, the -48 V power cable or +24 V power cable can be selected.
Exterior The type of BBU power cable depends on the type of equipment supplying power to the BBU. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
When the BBU is powered by the DCDU-03B or PDU, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 power connector at one end and bare wires at the other end, which needs to be added with a proper connector onsite. Figure 7-74 shows the BBU power cable with an OT terminal at the other end. Figure 7-74 BBU power cable (1)
(1) 3V3 power connector
(2) OT terminal (M6, 6 mm2, or 0.0093 in.²)
NOTE
The preceding figure shows a -48 V power cable, which consists of a blue wire and a black wire. A +24 V power cable has the same exterior as a -48 V power cable, but it consists of a red wire and a black wire.
When the BBU is powered by the EPS, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 power connector at one end and a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-75. Figure 7-75 BBU power cable (2)
(1) Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
(2) 3V3 power connector
When the BBU is powered by the AC/DC power equipment, the BBU power cable has two 3V3 power connectors at one end and an H4 connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-76.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-76 BBU power cable (3)
(1) 3V3 power connector
(2) H4 connector
When the BBU is powered by the EPU, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 power connector at one end and a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-77. Figure 7-77 BBU power cable (4)
(1) 3V3 power connector
(2)Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
Pin Assignment A power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-51 and Table 7-52 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a power cable. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-51 Pin assignment for the wires of the -48 V power cable Pin of the 3V3 Connector
Color
Description
A1
Blue
-48 V
A2
-
-
A3
Black
GND
Table 7-52 Pin assignment for the wires of the +24 V power cable Pin of the 3V3 Connector
Color
Description
A1
Red
+24 V
A2
-
-
A3
Black
GND
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable An E1/T1 cable transmits baseband signals from BBU to the external transmission equipment.
Exterior The E1/T1 cable is of three types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable, 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable, and 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable. One end of the E1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cable is prepared on site based on site requirements. Figure 7-78 shows an E1/T1 cable. Figure 7-78 E1/T1 signal cable
(1) DB26 male connector
Table 7-53 lists different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-53 Different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables Cable
One End
The Other End
75 ohm E1 coaxial cable
DB26 male connector
L9 male connector L9 female connector SMB female connector BNC male connector SMZ male connector SMZ female connector
Pin Assignment Table 7-54, Table 7-55, and Table 7-56 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 cable. NOTE
In Table 7-54, "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.
Table 7-54 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Pin on the DB26 Male Connector
Type
Coaxial Unit No.
Wire Label
X1.1
Tip
1
RX1+
X1.2
Ring
X1.3
Tip
X1.4
Ring
X1.5
Tip
X1.6
Ring
X1.7
Tip
X1.8
Ring
X1.19
Tip
X1.20
Ring
X1.21
Tip
X1.22
Ring
X1.23
Tip
X1.24
Ring
RX13
RX2+ RX2-
5
RX3+ RX3-
7
RX4+ RX4-
2
TX1+ TX1-
4
TX2+ TX2-
6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
TX3+ TX3302
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the DB26 Male Connector
Type
Coaxial Unit No.
Wire Label
X1.25
Tip
8
TX4+
X1.26
Ring
TX4-
Table 7-55 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable Pin on the DB26 Male Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Wire Label
X.1
Blue
Twisted pair
RX1+
X.2
White
X.3
Orange
X.4
White
X.5
Green
X.6
White
X.7
Brown
X.8
White
X.19
Gray
X.20
White
X.21
Blue
X.22
Red
X.23
Orange
X.24
Red
X.25
Green
X.26
Red
RX1Twisted pair
RX2+ RX2-
Twisted pair
RX3+ RX3-
Twisted pair
RX4+ RX4-
Twisted pair
TX1+ TX1-
Twisted pair
TX2+ TX2-
Twisted pair
TX3+ TX3-
Twisted pair
TX4+ TX4-
Table 7-56 Pin assignment for the wires of the 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Pin on the DB26 Male Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Wire Label
X.1
Blue and white
Twisted pair
RX1+
X.2
White and blue
X.3
Orange and white
RX1Twisted pair
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RX2+
303
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the DB26 Male Connector
Wire Color
X.4
White and orange
X.5
Green and white
X.6
White and green
X.7
Brown and white
X.8
White and brown
X.19
Gray and white
X.20
White and gray
X.21
Blue and red
X.22
Red and blue
X.23
Orange and red
X.24
Red and orange
X.25
Green and red
X.26
Red and green
Wire Type
Wire Label RX2-
Twisted pair
RX3+ RX3-
Twisted pair
RX4+ RX4-
Twisted pair
TX1+ TX1-
Twisted pair
TX2+ TX2-
Twisted pair
TX3+ TX3-
Twisted pair
TX4+ TX4-
7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the transmission board. This cable is optional.
Exterior The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25 male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-79. Figure 7-79 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
(1) DB25 male connector
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
(2) DB26 male connector
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin Assignment Table 7-57 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable. Table 7-57 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable Pin on the DB26 Male Connector
Type
Pin on the DB25 Male Connector
X1.20
Twisted pair cable
X2.2
X1.19 X1.4
X2.3 Twisted pair cable
X1.3 X1.22
X2.5 Twisted pair cable
X1.21 X1.6
Twisted pair cable
Twisted pair cable
Twisted pair cable
X2.12 X2.13
Twisted pair cable
X1.2 X1.25
X2.10 X2.11
X1.7 X1.1
X2.8 X2.9
X1.23 X1.8
X2.6 X2.7
X1.5 X1.24
X2.4
X2.14 X2.15
Twisted pair cable
X1.26
X2.24 X2.25
7.2.6 FE/GE Cable The FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the external transmission equipment through routing equipment. It transmits baseband signals. NOTE
The maximum transmission distance of an FE/GE cable is 100 m (328.08 ft).
Exterior The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable, which has an RJ45 connector at each end. Figure 7-80 shows an FE/GE cable.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-80 FE/GE cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment Table 7-58 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable. Table 7-58 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable Pin on the RJ45 Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connector
X1.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X2.2
X1.1
White and orange
X1.6
Green
X1.3
White and green
X1.4
Blue
X1.5
White and blue
X1.8
Brown
X1.7
White and brown
X2.1 Twisted pair
X2.6 X2.3
Twisted pair
X2.4 X2.5
Twisted pair
X2.8 X2.7
7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable The FE surge protection transfer cable is used to connect the UFLP and the main control board. It is an optional cable.
Exterior The FE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-81.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-81 FE surge protection transfer cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment Table 7-59 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable. Table 7-59 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable Pin on the RJ45 Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connector
X1.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X2.2
X1.1
White
X1.6
Green
X1.3
White
X1.4
Blue
X1.5
White
X1.8
Brown
X1.7
White
X2.1 Twisted pair
X2.6 X2.3
Twisted pair
X2.4 X2.5
Twisted pair
X2.8 X2.7
7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports This cable connects the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and WMPT to achieve co-transmission in IP mode.
Exterior The interconnection cable between the FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-82.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-82 Interconnection cable between FE electrical ports
(1) RJ45 connector
7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports This cable connects the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT to achieve co-transmission in IP mode.
Exterior The interconnection cable between the FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-83. Figure 7-83 Interconnection cable between FE optical ports
(1) LC connector
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable An FE/GE fiber optic cable transmits optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission equipment. This cable is optional.
Exterior The FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector, or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-84, Figure 7-85, Figure 7-86. Figure 7-84 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the FC and LC connectors)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-85 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the SC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-86 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the LC connectors)
CAUTION To connect a BBU3900 and a transmission device by using FE/GE optical fiber patch cords, adhere to the following rules: l
The TX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the RX port on the transmission equipment.
l
The RX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the TX port on the transmission equipment.
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals. NOTE
l An ODF can be used when the distance between a BBU and an RRU or the distance between interconnected RRUs is longer than 100 m (328.08 ft). l A single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU to an ODF or connects an ODF to an RRU.
Exterior Figure 7-87 shows a fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs, with a DLC connector at each end.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-87 Fiber optical cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs
(1) DLC connector
(2) Branch optical fiber
(3) Label on the branch optical fiber
When a fiber optical cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the optical fibers on the BBU side and RRU side are 0.34 m (0.013 in.) and 0.03 m (0.0012 in.) long, respectively. When a fiber optical cable connects two RRUs, the optical fibers on both RRU sides are 0.03 m (0.0012 in.) long. Figure 7-88 shows the connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU. Figure 7-88 Connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
(1) CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
Figure 7-89 shows a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU, with a DLC connector at one end and an FC connector at the other end. Figure 7-89 Single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU
(1) DLC connector
(2) Branch optical fiber
(3) Label on the branch optical fiber
(4) FC connector
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an ODF, the optical fibers on the BBU side and ODF side are 0.34 m (0.013 in.) and 0.8 m (0.031 in.) long, respectively. When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects an ODF and an RRU, the optical fibers on the RRU side and ODF side are 0.03 m (0.013 in.) and 0.8 m (0.031 in.) long, respectively. Figure 7-90 shows the connections for a single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU. Figure 7-90 Connections for a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU
(1) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU (2) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between an and an ODF ODF and an RRU
NOTE
A CPRI fiber optic cable must be connected to optical modules in the CPRI ports. A multi-mode fiber optic cable and single-mode fiber optic cable are connected to multi-mode optical modules and single-mode optical modules, respectively.
Pin Assignment Table 7-60, Table 7-61, and Table 7-62 describe the labels on and recommended connections for fiber optic cables of an optical assembly. Table 7-60 Labels on and recommended connections for optical fibers of an optical assembly between a BBU and an RRU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Label
Connected To
1A
CPRI RX port on the RRU
1B
CPRI TX port on the RRU
2A
TX port on the BBU
2B
RX port on the BBU
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-61 Labels on and recommended connections for optical fibers of a fiber optic cable between RRUs Label
Connected To
1A
CPRI RX port on RRU 1
1B
CPRI TX port on RRU 1
2A
CPRI TX port on RRU 0
2B
CPRI RX port on RRU 0
Table 7-62 Labels on and recommended connections for optical fibers of a single-mode optical assembly between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU Label
Connected To
1A
RX port on the BBU or CPRI RX port on the RRU
1B
TX port on the BBU or CPRI TX port on the RRU
2A
ODF
2B
ODF
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable The APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable is used to connect the APMI in the APM30 power cabinet and the BBU. The cable transmits environment monitoring signals of the APM30 power cabinet to the BBU.
Exterior The APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable has an RJ45 connector at one end and four bare wires at the other end. Figure 7-91 shows an APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable. Figure 7-91 APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin Assignment Table 7-63 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable. Table 7-63 Pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable Pin on the RJ45 Connector
Color
Pins of X2, X3, X4, and X5
Description
Corresponding Port on the APMI
X1.1
White
X2
Twisted pair
TX+
X1.2
Orange
X3
X1.4
Blue
X4
X1.5
White
X5
TXTwisted pair
RX+ RX-
7.2.13 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable The HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable transmits the monitoring information collected by the HEUA to the BBU.
Exterior Figure 7-92 shows an HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable. Figure 7-92 HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment Table 7-64 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable. Table 7-64 Pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Type
X1.3
X2.3
White
Twisted pair
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.
Exterior Figure 7-93 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU. Figure 7-93 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment Table 7-65 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU. Table 7-65 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Twisted pair 314
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Wire Type
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA A monitoring signal cable for the EMUA transmits monitoring signals from an EMUA to a BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.
Exterior Figure 7-94 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA. Figure 7-94 Monitoring signal cable for the EMUA
(1) RJ45 connector
(2) DB9 male connector
Pin Assignment Table 7-66 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA. Table 7-66 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Pin on the RJ45 Connector
DB9 male connector
Color
Description
Associated Port on the APMI
X1.1
X2.3
White
Twisted pair
TX+
X1.2
X2.7
Orange
X1.5
X2.6
White
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
TXTwisted pair
RX315
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the RJ45 Connector
DB9 male connector
Color
X1.4
X2.2
Blue
Description
Associated Port on the APMI RX+
7.2.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power status of the PSUs and receive related alarms.
Exterior Figure 7-95 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Figure 7-95 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
Cable Description Table 7-67 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Table 7-67 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
X1 End
Wire Color
Type
X1.2
Blue
Twisted pair
X1.1
White
X1.6
Orange
X1.3
White
X1.4
Green
X1.5
White
X1.8
Brown
X1.7
White
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
316
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
7.2.17 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position status of the PSU.
Exterior Figure 7-96 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Figure 7-96 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment Table 7-68 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Table 7-68 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.18 BBU Alarm Cable A BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior The BBU alarm cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-97. One RJ45 connector at one end, however, may be removed and an appropriate terminal may be added according to the field requirements. Figure 7-97 BBU alarm cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment Table 7-69 shows the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable. Table 7-69 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable BBU Alarm Port
Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r
Description
EXTALM1
X1.1
White and orange
Twisted pair
X2.1
Boolean input 4+
X1.2
Orange
X2.2
Boolean input 4- (GND)
X1.3
White and green
X2.3
Boolean input 5+
X1.6
Green
X2.6
Boolean input 5- (GND)
X1.5
White and blue
X2.5
Boolean input 6+
X1.4
Blue
X2.4
Boolean input 6- (GND)
X1.7
White and brown
X2.7
Boolean input 7+
X1.8
Brown
X2.8
Boolean input 7- (GND)
X1.1
White and orange
X2.1
Boolean input 0+
X1.2
Orange
X2.2
Boolean input 0+ (GND)
EXTALM0
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
BBU Alarm Port
Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r
Description
X1.3
White and green
Twisted pair
X2.3
Boolean input 1+
X1.6
Green
X2.6
Boolean input 1- (GND)
X1.5
White and blue
X2.5
Boolean input 2+
X1.4
Blue
X2.4
Boolean input 2- (GND)
X1.7
White and brown
X2.7
Boolean input 3+
X1.8
Brown
X2.8
Boolean input 3- (GND)
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.19 GPS Clock Signal Cable The GPS clock signal cable is used to transmit GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU. This cable is optional.
Exterior The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-98. Figure 7-98 GPS clock signal cable
(1) SMA male connector
(2) N-type female connector
7.2.20 Inter-BBU Signal Cable The inter-BBU signal cable connects BBU0 and BBU1 to forward information between the BBUs. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Type Inter-BBU signal cables are classified into different types based on their functions, as listed in Table 7-70. Table 7-70 Cable type Cable
Function
Installation Position
Inter-BBU signal cable
Forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU to another
Connects the UMPT and the UCIU
Forwards baseband information from one BBU to another
Interconnects two WBBPf boards
Exterior The inter-BBU signal cable forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in the same cabinet, the inter-BBU signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-99. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the interBBU signal cable is 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-100. Figure 7-99 Inter-BBU signal cable (1)
(1) DLC connector
(2) Breakout cable
Figure 7-100 Inter-BBU signal cable (2)
(1) DLC connector
(2) Armoured cable
(3) Breakout cable
The inter-BBU signal cable forwards baseband information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in the same cabinet, the inter-BBU signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-101. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the inter-BBU signal cable is 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-102. Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-101 Inter-BBU signal cable (3)
(1) MPO connector
(2) Heat shrink tubing
Figure 7-102 Inter-BBU signal cable (4)
(1) MPO connector
(2) Heat shrink tubing
7.2.21 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations When a 3012 series base station and a 3900 series base station are installed side-by-side, the cable between two combined base stations is used to connect the universal cascading interface unit (UCIU) in the 3900 series base station and the cabinet top backplane for DTRU BTS (DCTB) or DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.
Exterior There are two types of cables that can be used to connect two combined base stations. Figure 7-103 shows the cable connected to the DCTB in the 3012 series base station. Figure 7-103 Cable between two combined base stations (1)
(1) MD36 male connector
(2) DB15 male connector
Figure 7-104 shows the cable connected to the DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-104 Cable between two combined base stations (2)
(1) DB15 male connector
Pin Assignment As shown in Figure 7-103, the cable has a DB15 male connector at one end and an MD36 male connector at the other end. Table 7-71 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the cable. Table 7-71 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (1) Pin on the DB15 Male Connector
Pin on the MD36 Male Connector
Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.6
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.7
Blue
X1.3
X2.11
White
X1.4
X2.12
Orange
X1.5
X2.2
White
X1.10
X2.3
Green
X1.6
X2.15
White
X1.11
X2.16
Brown
X1.12
X2.10
White
X1.15
X2.28
Gray
X1.shell
X2.shell
Shield
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
As shown in Figure 7-104, the cable has a DB15 male connector at both ends. Table 7-72 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the cable. Table 7-72 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (2)
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Pin on the DB15 Male Connector
Pin on the DB15 Male Connector
Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Blue
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the DB15 Male Connector
Pin on the DB15 Male Connector
Color
Wire Type
X1.3
X2.3
White
Twisted pair
X1.4
X2.4
Orange
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.10
X2.10
Green
X1.6
X2.6
White
X1.11
X2.11
Brown
X1.12
X2.12
White
X1.15
X2.15
Gray
X1.shell
X2.shell
Shield
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.22 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance An adapter used for local maintenance connects the USB port on the UMPT to an Ethernet cable during local maintenance.
Exterior The adapter used for local maintenance has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernet connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-105. Figure 7-105 Adapter used for local maintenance
Pin Assignment Table 7-73 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance.
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
DBS3900 Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-73 Pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-04-25)
Pin of the USB Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin of the Ethernet Connector
X1.9
Blue
Twisted pair
X2.1
X1.8
White
X1.6
Orange
X1.5
White
X1.Shell
-
X2.2 Twisted pair
X2.3 X2.6
Shell
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
X2.Shell
324
